HTC Touch HD User Manual

User Manual  
www.htc.com  
 
Google is a registered trademark and Google Maps is a trademark of Google, Inc. in  
the United States and other countries.  
YouTube is a trademark of Google, Inc.  
Copyright © ꢀ008, Esmertec AG. All Rights Reserved.  
Copyright © ꢀ00ꢁ-ꢀ008, ArcSoft, Inc. and its licensors. All Rights Reserved. ArcSoft  
and the ArcSoft logo are registered trademarks of ArcSoft, Inc. in the United States  
and/or other countries.  
Copyright © ꢀ004-ꢀ008, Ilium Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  
All other company, product and service names mentioned herein are trademarks,  
registered trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.  
HTC shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained  
herein, nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from furnishing this  
material. The information is provided “as iswithout warranty of any kind and is  
subject to change without notice. HTC also reserves the right to revise the content  
of this document at any time without prior notice.  
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any  
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or storing in a  
retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form without prior written  
permission of HTC.  
4
Disclaimers  
THE WEATHER INFORMATION, STOCK DATA, DATA AND DOCUMENTATION ARE  
PROVIDED “AS ISAND WITHOUT WARRANTY OR TECHNICAL SUPPORT OF ANY  
KIND FROM HTC. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, HTC  
AND ITS AFFILIATES expressly disclaim any and all representations and warranties,  
express or implied, arising by law or otherwise, regarding the Weather Information,  
Stock Data, Data, Documentation, or any other Products and services, including  
without limitation any express or implied warranty of merchantability, express  
or implied warranty of fitness for a particular purpose, non-infringement, quality,  
accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, usefulness, that the Weather  
Information, Stock Data, Data and/or Documentation will be error-free, or implied  
warranties arising from course of dealing or course of performance.  
Without limiting the foregoing, it is further understood that HTC and its Providers  
are not responsible for Your use or misuse of the Weather Information, Stock Data,  
Data and/or Documentation or the results from such use. HTC and its Providers  
make no express or implied warranties, guarantees or affirmations that weather  
information will occur or has occurred as the reports, forecasts, data, or information  
state, represent or depict and it shall have no responsibility or liability whatsoever  
to any person or entity, parties and non-parties alike, for any inconsistency,  
inaccuracy, or omission for weather or events predicted or depicted, reported,  
occurring or occurred. WITHOUT LIMITING THE GENERALITY OF THE FOREGOING,  
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE WEATHER INFORMATION, STOCK DATA, DATA AND/  
OR DOCUMENTATION MAY INCLUDE INACCURACIES AND YOU WILL USE COMMON  
SENSE AND FOLLOW STANDARD SAFETY PRECAUTIONS IN CONNECTION WITH THE  
USE OF THE WEATHER INFORMATION, STOCK DATA, DATA OR DOCUMENTATION.  
5
Limitation of Damages  
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL  
HTC OR ITS PROVIDERS BE LIABLE TO USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY  
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY  
KIND, IN CONTRACT OR TORT, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INJURY, LOSS OF  
REVENUE, LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY, LOSS OF DATA,  
AND/OR LOSS OF PROFITS ARISING OUT OF, OR RELATED TO, IN ANY MANNER,  
OR THE DELIVERY, PERFORMANCE OR NONPERFORMANCE OF OBLIGATIONS, OR  
USE OF THE WEATHER INFORMATION, STOCK DATA, DATA OR DOCUMENTATION  
HEREUNDER REGARDLESS OF THE FORESEEABILITY THEREOF.  
Important Health Information and Safety Precautions  
When using this product, the safety precautions below must be taken to avoid  
possible legal liabilities and damages.  
Retain and follow all product safety and operating instructions. Observe all  
warnings in the operating instructions on the product.  
To reduce the risk of bodily injury, electric shock, fire, and damage to the  
equipment, observe the following precautions.  
ELECTRICAL SAFETY  
This product is intended for use when supplied with power from the designated  
battery or power supply unit. Other usage may be dangerous and will invalidate  
any approval given to this product.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR PROPER GROUNDING INSTALLATION  
CAUTION: Connecting to an improperly grounded equipment can result in an  
electric shock to your device.  
This product is equipped with a USB Cable for connecting with desktop or  
notebook computer. Be sure your computer is properly grounded (earthed) before  
connecting this product to the computer. The power supply cord of a desktop or  
notebook computer has an equipment-grounding conductor and a grounding  
plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet which is properly  
installed and grounded in accordance with all local codes and ordinances.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR POWER SUPPLY UNIT  
Use the correct external power source  
A product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated  
on the electrical ratings label. If you are not sure of the type of power source  
required, consult your authorized service provider or local power company.  
For a product that operates from battery power or other sources, refer to the  
operating instructions that are included with the product.  
Handle battery packs carefully  
This product contains a Li-ion or Li-ion Polymer battery. There is a risk of  
fire and burns if the battery pack is handled improperly. Do not attempt to  
open or service the battery pack. Do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short  
external contacts or circuits, dispose of in fire or water, or expose a battery  
pack to temperatures higher than ꢂ0˚C (140˚F).  
WARNING: Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. To reduce risk  
of fire or burns, do not disassemble, crush, puncture, short external contacts,  
expose to temperature above ꢂ0° C (140° F), or dispose of in fire or water.  
Replace only with specified batteries. Recycle or dispose of used batteries  
according to the local regulations or reference guide supplied with your  
product.  
Take extra precautions  
Keep the battery or device dry and away from water or any liquid as it may  
cause a short circuit.  
Keep metal objects away so they don’t come in contact with the battery or  
its connectors as it may lead to short circuit during operation.  
Do not use a battery that appears damaged, deformed, or discolored, or  
the one that has any rust on its casing, overheats, or emits a foul odor.  
Always keep the battery out of the reach of babies and small children, to  
avoid swallowing of the battery. Consult the doctor immediately if the  
battery is swallowed.  
If the battery leaks:  
Do not allow the leaking fluid to come in contact with skin or clothing.  
If already in contact, flush the affected area immediately with clean  
water and seek medical advice.  
Do not allow the leaking fluid to come in contact with eyes. If already  
in contact, DO NOT rub; rinse with clean water immediately and seek  
medical advice.  
Take extra precautions to keep a leaking battery away from fire as  
there is a danger of ignition or explosion.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR DIRECT SUNLIGHT  
Keep this product away from excessive moisture and extreme temperatures. Do not  
leave the product or its battery inside a vehicle or in places where the temperature  
may exceed ꢂ0°C (140°F), such as on a car dashboard, window sill, or behind a glass  
that is exposed to direct sunlight or strong ultraviolet light for extended periods  
of time. This may damage the product, overheat the battery, or pose a risk to the  
vehicle.  
8
PREVENTION OF HEARING LOSS  
CAUTION: Permanent hearing loss may occur if earphones or  
headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time.  
NOTE: For France, Earphone (listed below) for this device have been tested to comply  
with the Sound Pressure Level requirement laid down in the applicable NF EN 50ꢁꢁꢀ-  
1:ꢀ000 and/or NF EN 50ꢁꢁꢀ-ꢀ:ꢀ00ꢁ standards as required by French Article L. 5ꢀꢁꢀ-1.  
Earphone, manufactured by HTC, Model HS Gꢁꢁ5.  
SAFETY IN AIRCRAFT  
Due to the possible interference caused by this product to an aircraft’s navigation  
system and its communications network, using this device’s phone function on  
board an airplane is against the law in most countries. If you want to use this  
device when on board an aircraft, remember to turn off your phone by switching to  
Airplane Mode.  
ENVIRONMENT RESTRICTIONS  
Do not use this product in gas stations, fuel depots, chemical plants or where  
blasting operations are in progress, or in potentially explosive atmospheres such  
as fuelling areas, fuel storehouses, below deck on boats, chemical plants, fuel or  
chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air contains chemicals or  
particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders. Please be aware that sparks in such  
areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death.  
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES  
When in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere or where flammable  
materials exist, the product should be turned off and the user should obey all signs  
and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in  
bodily injury or even death. Users are advised not to use the equipment at refueling  
points such as service or gas stations, and are reminded of the need to observe  
restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, chemical plants, or where  
9
blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere  
are often, but not always, clearly marked. These include fueling areas, below deck  
on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, and areas where the air  
contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders.  
ROAD SAFETY  
Vehicle drivers in motion are not permitted to use telephony services with  
handheld devices, except in the case of emergency. In some countries, using hands-  
free devices as an alternative is allowed.  
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR RF EXPOSURE  
Avoid using your phone near metal structures (for example, the steel frame of  
a building).  
Avoid using your phone near strong electromagnetic sources, such as  
microwave ovens, sound speakers, TV and radio.  
Use only original manufacturer-approved accessories, or accessories that do  
not contain any metal.  
Use of non-original manufacturer-approved accessories may violate your  
local RF exposure guidelines and should be avoided.  
INTERFERENCE WITH MEDICAL EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONS  
This product may cause medical equipment to malfunction. The use of this device is  
forbidden in most hospitals and medical clinics.  
If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your  
device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your  
physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information.  
Turn your phone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in  
these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using  
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
10  
HEARING AIDS  
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event  
of such interference, you may want to consult your service provider, or call the  
customer service line to discuss alternatives.  
NONIONIZING RADIATION  
Your device has an internal antenna. This product should be operated in its normal-  
use position to ensure the radiative performance and safety of the interference.  
As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for  
satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is  
recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the  
antenna during operation of the equipment.  
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Use of unauthorized or modified antennas  
may impair call quality and damage the phone, causing loss of performance and  
SAR levels exceeding the recommended limits as well as result in non-compliance  
with local regulatory requirements in your country.  
To assure optimal phone performance  
and ensure human exposure to RF  
energy is within the guidelines set  
forth in the relevant standards, always  
use your device only in its normal-use  
position. Contact with the antenna  
area may impair call quality and cause  
your device to operate at a higher  
power level than needed. Avoiding  
contact with the antenna area when the  
phone is IN USE optimizes the antenna  
performance and the battery life.  
Antenna  
location  
11  
General Precautions  
Avoid applying excessive pressure to the device  
Do not apply excessive pressure on the screen and the device to prevent  
damaging them and remove the device from your pantspocket before sitting  
down. It is also recommended that you store the device in a protective case  
and only use the device stylus or your finger when interacting with the touch  
screen. Cracked display screens due to improper handling are not covered by  
the warranty.  
Device getting warm after prolonged use  
When using your device for prolonged periods of time, such as when you’re  
talking on the phone, charging the battery or browsing the web, the device  
may become warm. In most cases, this condition is normal and therefore  
should not be interpreted as a problem with the device.  
Heed service markings  
Except as explained elsewhere in the Operating or Service documentation,  
do not service any product yourself. Service needed on components inside  
the device should be done by an authorized service technician or provider.  
Damage requiring service  
Unplug the product from the electrical outlet and refer servicing to an  
authorized service technician or provider under the following conditions:  
Liquid has been spilled or an object has fallen onto the product.  
The product has been exposed to rain or water.  
The product has been dropped or damaged.  
There are noticeable signs of overheating.  
The product does not operate normally when you follow the operating  
instructions.  
Avoid hot areas  
The product should be placed away from heat sources such as radiators, heat  
registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.  
1ꢀ  
Avoid wet areas  
Never use the product in a wet location.  
Avoid using your device after a dramatic change in temperature  
When you move your device between environments with very different  
temperature and/or humidity ranges, condensation may form on or within  
the device. To avoid damaging the device, allow sufficient time for the  
moisture to evaporate before using the device.  
NOTICE: When taking the device from low-temperature conditions into a warmer  
environment or from high-temperature conditions into a cooler environment,  
allow the device to acclimate to room temperature before turning on power.  
Avoid pushing objects into product  
Never push objects of any kind into cabinet slots or other openings in the  
product. Slots and openings are provided for ventilation. These openings  
must not be blocked or covered.  
Mounting accessories  
Do not use the product on an unstable table, cart, stand, tripod, or bracket.  
Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions,  
and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.  
Avoid unstable mounting  
Do not place the product with an unstable base.  
Use product with approved equipment  
This product should be used only with personal computers and options  
identified as suitable for use with your equipment.  
Adjust the volume  
Turn down the volume before using headphones or other audio devices.  
Cleaning  
Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid  
cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning, but NEVER use  
water to clean the LCD screen.  
1ꢁ  
Contents  
14  
15  
1ꢂ  
1ꢃ  
18  
19  
ꢀ0  
ꢀ1  
ꢀ4 Getting Started  
1.1 Getting to Know Your Touch Phone and Accessories  
Left panel  
Right panel  
VOLUME UP  
During a call or when  
playing music, press  
this button to increase  
the volume.  
VOLUME DOWN  
During a call or when  
playing music, press  
this button to lower  
the volume.  
Stylus  
(See “Stylusin this  
chapter for details.)  
 
Getting Started ꢀ5  
Front panel  
Light Sensor  
Senses the ambient light and adjusts  
the screen backlight accordingly.  
Second Camera  
Use this camera for video  
call conversations or to  
take a self-portrait.  
Earpiece  
Listen to a phone  
call from here.  
Touch Screen  
HOME  
Press to return to the  
Home screen. See  
Chapter ꢁ for details.  
BACK  
Press to return to the  
previous screen.  
TALK/SEND  
END  
Press to answer an  
incoming call or dial a  
number.  
Press to end a call or  
return to the Home  
screen.  
During a call, press  
and hold to toggle  
the speakerphone on  
and off.  
Press and hold to use  
Voice Speed Dial. (See  
Chapter 1ꢀ for details.)  
Press and hold to lock  
the device.  
(To customize the  
END key, tap Start >  
Settings > Personal  
tab > Buttons > End  
Key tab).  
Note  
By default, the device vibrates when you press any of the virtual buttons — TALK/  
SEND, HOME, BACK and END. To disable the vibration, tap Start > Settings >  
Personal tab > Buttons > Virtual Buttons tab, then clear the Vibrate the device  
check box.  
ꢀꢂ Getting Started  
Back panel  
Speaker  
5.0 Megapixel Camera  
See “Taking Photos and  
Videosin Chapter 11  
for details.  
Back Cover  
Getting Started ꢀꢃ  
Top panel  
3.5 mm Audio Jack  
Connect the supplied stereo headset  
for hands-free conversation or for  
listening to audio media.  
POWER  
Press to turn off the display  
temporarily. To turn off the power,  
press and hold for about ꢁ seconds.  
For more information, see “Starting  
Upin this chapter.  
Notification LED*  
See description below.  
* The Notification LED under the POWER button shows a:  
Flashing green light when there are new SMS, MMS or e-mail messages, missed calls, or  
reminders.  
Solid green light when the device is connected to the power adapter or a computer and the  
battery is fully charged.  
Solid amber light when the battery is being charged.  
Flashing amber light when the remaining battery level reaches below 10%.  
Bottom panel  
Sync Connector  
Connect the supplied USB cable to  
synchronize information or plug in the  
AC adapter to recharge the battery.  
Microphone  
28ꢀ GettingꢀStarted  
Accessories  
Theꢀproductꢀpackageꢀincludesꢀtheꢀfollowingꢀitemsꢀandꢀaccessories:  
Battery  
ACꢀadapter  
Screenꢀprotector  
Wiredꢀstereoꢀheadset  
USBꢀsyncꢀcable  
Pouch  
QuickꢀStartꢀGuide  
GettingꢀStartedꢀandꢀApplicationꢀdiscs  
Extraꢀstylus  
8GBꢀmicroSD™ꢀcard  
1.2 Installing the SIM Card, Battery, and Storage Card  
AlwaysꢀturnꢀoffꢀyourꢀdeviceꢀbeforeꢀinstallingꢀorꢀreplacingꢀtheꢀSIMꢀcard,ꢀbattery,ꢀandꢀ  
storageꢀcard.ꢀYouꢀalsoꢀneedꢀtoꢀremoveꢀtheꢀbackꢀcoverꢀbeforeꢀyouꢀcanꢀinstallꢀtheseꢀ  
components.  
To remove the back cover  
1. Makeꢀsureꢀyourꢀdeviceꢀisꢀturnedꢀoff.  
2. Firmlyꢀholdꢀtheꢀdeviceꢀwithꢀbothꢀ  
handsꢀandꢀtheꢀfrontꢀpanelꢀfacingꢀ  
down.  
3. Pushꢀtheꢀlowerꢀpartꢀofꢀtheꢀbackꢀ  
coverꢀupꢀwithꢀyourꢀthumbsꢀuntilꢀitꢀ  
disengagesꢀfromꢀtheꢀdeviceꢀandꢀthenꢀ  
slideꢀitꢀupꢀtoꢀremove.  
SIM card  
TheꢀSIMꢀcardꢀcontainsꢀyourꢀphoneꢀnumber,ꢀserviceꢀdetails,ꢀandꢀphonebook/  
messageꢀmemory.ꢀYourꢀdeviceꢀsupportsꢀbothꢀ1.8Vꢀandꢀ3VꢀSIMꢀcards.  
Note  
SomeꢀlegacyꢀSIMꢀcardsꢀmayꢀnotꢀfunctionꢀwithꢀyourꢀdevice.ꢀYouꢀshouldꢀconsultꢀwithꢀ  
yourꢀserviceꢀproviderꢀforꢀaꢀreplacementꢀSIMꢀcard.ꢀThereꢀmayꢀbeꢀfeesꢀforꢀthisꢀservice.  
 
Getting Started ꢀ9  
To install the SIM card  
1. Make sure your device is turned off.  
Cut-off corner  
2. Locate the SIM card slot, then insert  
the SIM card with its gold contacts  
facing down and its cut-off corner  
facing out the card slot.  
3. Slide the SIM card completely into  
the slot.  
To remove the SIM card  
1. Remove the battery if it is installed.  
2. Slide the SIM card out from the SIM card slot with your thumb.  
Battery  
Your device comes with a rechargeable Lithium-ion polymer battery and is  
designed to use only manufacturer-specified original batteries and accessories.  
Battery performance depends on many factors, including network configuration,  
signal strength, the temperature of the environment in which you operate  
your device, the features and/or settings you select and use, items attached to  
connecting ports, and your voice, data, and other program usage patterns.  
Battery life estimates (approximations):  
Talk time:  
Up to 420 minutes for WCDMA  
Up to 480 minutes for GSM  
Standby time: Up to 680 hours for WCDMA  
Up to 440 hours for GSM  
Video call time: Up to 140 minutes  
Note  
Battery life is subject to network and phone usage.  
ꢁ0 Getting Started  
Warning!  
To reduce risk of fire or burns:  
Do not attempt to open, disassemble, or service the battery pack.  
Do not crush, puncture, short external contacts, or dispose of in fire or water.  
Do not expose to temperatures above ꢂ0oC (140oF).  
Replace only with the battery pack designated for this product.  
Recycle or dispose of used battery as stipulated by local regulations.  
To install the battery  
1. Align the battery’s exposed copper  
contacts with the battery connectors  
inside the battery compartment.  
2. Insert the contacts side of the battery first  
and then gently push the battery into  
place.  
3. Replace the back cover.  
To remove the battery  
1. Make sure your device is turned off.  
2. Remove the back cover.  
Battery grip  
3. The upper right side of the battery has a  
protruding grip. Lift the protruding grip to  
remove the battery.  
Getting Started ꢁ1  
Storage card  
To have additional storage for your images, videos, music, and files, you can  
purchase a microSD™ card and install it into the your device.  
To install a microSD card  
Insert the microSD card into the slot with  
its gold contacts facing down until it clicks  
into place.  
Note  
To remove the microSD card, press it to  
eject it from the slot.  
Storage card slot  
1.3 Charging the Battery  
New batteries are shipped partially charged. Before you start using your device, it is  
recommended that you install and charge the battery. Some batteries perform best  
after several full charge/discharge cycles.  
To charge the battery  
1. Connect the USB connector of the AC adapter to the sync connector on your  
device.  
2. Plug in the AC adapter to an electrical outlet to start charging the battery.  
Note  
Only the AC adapter and USB sync cable provided with your device must be used to  
charge the device.  
Charging is indicated by a solid amber light on the LED indicator under the POWER  
button. As the battery is being charged while the power is on, a charging icon  
also appears in the title bar of the Home screen. After the battery has been fully  
charged, a full battery icon  
appears in the title bar of the Home screen.  
 
ꢁꢀ Getting Started  
Warning!  
Do not remove the battery from the device while you are charging it using  
the AC or car adapter.  
As a safety precaution, the battery stops charging when it overheats.  
1.4 Starting Up  
After installing your SIM card and battery and charging the battery, you can now  
power on and start using your device.  
Turn your device on and off  
To turn on the power  
1. Press the POWER button.  
2. When you turn on your device for the first time, a Quick Start Wizard guides  
you through the screen calibration process and the set up of date and time  
and password. For more information about these settings, see Chapter  
1ꢁ. After the Quick Start Wizard finishes, the device installs customization  
settings, then restarts.  
To turn off the power  
1. Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds.  
2. Tap Yes when a message prompts you to choose whether or not to turn off  
the device completely.  
Auto configure the data connection settings  
The first time you power on your device, you will see a notification message from  
Connection Setup. Connection Setup automatically configures your device’s data  
connections, such as ꢁG/EDGE/GPRS, MMS, and WAP, so that you do not need to  
enter the settings manually for your device.  
 
Getting Started ꢁꢁ  
To automatically configure data connection settings  
1. When you see the notification message from the  
Connection Setup, tap Yes.  
Note If you do not see the notification message, tap  
on the Title bar to display the message.  
2. If your SIM card supports multiple network  
operator profiles, a message will appear with  
network profile choices. Select the profile you  
want to use and tap OK.  
3. Connection Setup then starts to configure your  
device’s data connection settings.  
4. After the Connection Setup completes the  
configuration, tap Restart.  
For more information about Connection Setup, see Chapter 1ꢁ.  
Switch to Sleep mode when not in use  
Briefly press the POWER button to turn off the display temporarily and switch your  
device to Sleep mode. Sleep mode suspends your device to a low power state  
while the display is off in order to save battery power.  
Your device automatically goes into Sleep mode when you leave the device idle  
after a certain period of time. You will still be able to receive messages and calls  
while your device is in Sleep mode. Pressing the POWER button again or incoming  
calls will wake up your device.  
ꢁ4 Getting Started  
1.5 Navigating Your Device  
There are different ways you can navigate and interact with the interface of your  
device.  
Finger-touch control  
A quick and easy way to interact with the home screen and the whole interface  
of your device is by touch. Basically, the following are the types of actions, called  
finger gestures, you would use when interacting with your device:  
Touch or tap  
When selecting items on the screen, such as the Home screen tabs, Start menu,  
programs and settings icons, and large on-screen buttons, simply touch them with  
your finger. Apply some pressure with your finger pad when touching an item on  
the screen.  
Tapping means to touch lightly and quickly with your finger pad or fingertip.  
On screens that display smaller-size items, you can more accurately select an item  
by tapping it with your fingertip.  
Swipe  
To swipe means to drag your finger vertically or horizontally across the screen.  
The following are some instances when you would use swiping:  
Flipping on the Home screen  
Swipe your finger vertically to flip through favorite contacts, messages, music  
albums, photos, and more. For more information, see “Using the TouchFLO ꢁD  
Home Screenin Chapter ꢁ.  
Scrolling  
When browsing the contacts list, web pages, documents, and certain  
selection lists on the Home screen (such as the All Programs list), slowly  
swipe your finger vertically across the screen to scroll. This allows you to scroll  
by page and to view the content or available selections as you scroll.  
 
Getting Started ꢁ5  
The direction of swiping resembles the way you move a printed document as  
you are reading it. For detailed instructions, see “Finger scrollingin Chapter ꢁ.  
Slide  
Sliding on the touch screen also involves dragging with your finger, but you need  
to press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to drag. While  
dragging, do not release your finger until you have reached the target position.  
The following are some instances when you would use sliding:  
Switching between Home screen tabs  
Slide your finger left and right to switch between the Home screen tabs. For  
more information, see “Using the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen“ in Chapter ꢁ.  
Advancing playback  
In players that have a progress bar, such as the Home screen’s Music tab  
and Windows Media® Player Mobile, slide your finger horizontally on their  
progress bar to advance forward or move backward in the music or video you  
are playing.  
For more information about the Home screen’s Music tab, see “Musicin  
Chapter ꢁ.  
For more information about Windows Media® Player Mobile, see “Using  
Windows Media® Player Mobilein Chapter 11.  
Flick  
Flicking the screen is similar to swiping, except that you need to swipe your finger  
in light, quicker strokes. This finger gesture is always in a vertical direction, such as  
when flicking the contacts list. See “Finger scrollingin Chapter ꢁ for details.  
Finger zooming and panning  
In programs such as Album and Opera Mobile, you can use finger gestures when  
zooming and panning. See Chapter ꢁ, 8 and 11 for details.  
ꢁꢂ Getting Started  
Stylus  
You can use the stylus to navigate and interact with the touch screen. To use the  
stylus, pull it out from the stylus compartment at the bottom of the right panel of  
your device.  
The stylus is magnetic and sticks to the side when held close to the device. This  
prevents you from accidentally losing or misplacing the stylus.  
Basically, you tap with the stylus to open programs and select items on the screen,  
and you tap and hold on the screen to open a shortcut menu. You can also use the  
stylus the same way as what you do with finger gestures, such as swiping, sliding  
and flicking on the screen.  
On-screen navigation control  
When using the Full QWERTY or Compact QWERTY on-screen keyboard, you can  
touch the Navigation Control keys at the bottom of the keyboard for directional  
control. Touch the directional arrows to navigate up, down, left, and right on the  
screen.  
Navigation  
Control keys  
Getting Started ꢁꢃ  
1.6 Home Screen  
The default home screen of the device is the TouchFLO™ ꢁD Home screen which  
allows finger-touch access to the most important functions such as contacts, text  
messages, e-mail, Internet, and more.  
For more information about using the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, see Chapter ꢁ.  
Signal strength  
Connection status  
Notification  
Adjust volume  
Battery status  
Start menu  
Quick menu  
TouchFLO ꢁD  
Home screen  
Open the  
Programs tab.  
Open the Phone screen  
(See Chapter ꢀ for details)  
 
ꢁ8 Getting Started  
1.7 Status Icons  
When you touch or tap the icon area of the title bar, the System Status screen opens  
and displays larger status icons so you can touch them with your finger more easily  
and accurately.  
Tip  
The System Status screen can be disabled in TouchFLO settings. See “Settings on your  
Devicein Chapter 1ꢁ for details.  
The following are some of the status icons that you may see on the device.  
Icons that appear in this area  
Icons that appear in this area  
Battery charging  
Vibrate mode  
Battery full  
Sound on  
Sound off  
Battery very low  
 
Getting Started ꢁ9  
Icons that appear in this area  
Icons that appear in this area  
Connection Setup  
Speakerphone on  
Roaming  
Multiple notifications; tap the  
icon to view all  
New text messages;  
Alarm  
SMS notification of voice mail  
Other wireless network(s)  
detected  
Sending MMS  
Receiving MMS  
MMS sent  
Wired headset connected  
Bluetooth on  
Bluetooth visible mode on  
Cannot send MMS  
Bluetooth stereo headset  
connected  
New incoming MMS  
New Windows Live™ message  
Missed call  
40 Getting Started  
Icons that appear in this area  
Icons that appear in this area  
GPRS available  
GPRS connecting  
EDGE available  
GPRS in use  
HSPA available  
EDGE connecting  
EDGE in use  
WCDMA/UMTS available  
Connected to a wireless  
network  
HSPA connecting  
HSPA in use  
Connection is active  
WCDMA/UMTS connecting  
WCDMA/UMTS in use  
Connection is not active  
Synchronization in  
progress  
Maximum signal strength  
No signal  
Phone is turned off  
No phone service  
Searching for phone service  
Voice call in progress  
Call on hold  
Calls are forwarded  
Dialing while no SIM card is  
inserted  
No SIM card inserted  
Getting Started 41  
1.8 Start Menu  
The Start menu, which can be opened from the top left corner of the screen, gives  
you access to all the programs and settings of your Windows Mobile-powered  
device. Touch or tap to select an item on the Start menu.  
Open the Start menu.  
Open a recently-used program.  
When you are on another  
screen, touch or tap this item  
to return to the TouchFLO ꢁD  
Home screen.  
Open a program.  
Access more programs.  
View and change settings.  
View Help information  
for the current screen.  
By default, the Start menu is displayed in a large size to make it easier for you to  
touch menu items with your finger when selecting them from the Start menu.  
The Start menu can also be displayed in a smaller size, if preferred. Tap Start >  
Settings > System tab > TouchFLO and then clear the Enable large Start menu  
check box to display a smaller Start menu.  
 
4ꢀ Getting Started  
1.9 Quick Menu  
The Quick menu, which can be opened from the top right corner of the screen,  
shows the currently running programs. You can quickly switch between running  
programs, stop programs, and see how much program memory is being used.  
Customize Task Manager settings.  
(See “Using Task Managerin  
Chapter 1ꢁ.)  
Touch this icon to open  
the Quick Menu.  
Shows the total percentage  
Stop all  
of program memory in use.  
Touch to open the Memory  
settings screen.  
currently  
running  
programs.  
To switch to a running  
program, touch the  
program name.  
To stop a running  
program, touch  
.
 
Getting Started 4ꢁ  
1.10 Adjusting the Volume  
Adjusting the system volume changes the volume level of sound notifications and  
audio/video playback, whereas adjusting the ring volume affects only the volume  
of the phone ring. The system volume and ring volume can be separately adjusted.  
1. Touch the icon area in the title bar and then touch the Speaker icon (  
) on  
the System Status screen.  
2. To switch between the Ring Volume and System Volume screens, touch  
Ring or System on top of the screen.  
3. On either screens, you can do the following:  
To increase or decrease the volume level, drag your finger up or down the  
volume bars. You can also press the VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons on the  
left panel of your device.  
Volume bars  
Touch Vibrate to switch both System and Ring to Vibrate mode.  
Touch Silent to mute both the system and ring volume.  
 
44 Getting Started  
4. The System Volume or Ring Volume screen automatically closes. You can also  
manually close the screen by touching the screen.  
Note  
On certain screens that do not show the volume status icon on the title bar, you need  
to use the VOLUME UP/DOWN buttons on the left panel of your device to adjust the  
volume. Also use these buttons to adjust the conversation phone volume during an  
ongoing call.  
1.11 When Connecting Your Device to a Computer  
Whenever you connect your device to the computer with the USB cable, the  
Connect to PC screen will be displayed and will prompt you to choose the type of  
USB connection:  
ActiveSync  
Select this mode when you need to do the following:  
Synchronize Outlook e-mail messages, contacts, calendar appointments,  
files, and other data between your device and your computer.  
Have read and write access to the whole device.  
For more information about using ActiveSync, see Chapter 5.  
Disk Drive  
This mode is available for selection only when you installed a microSD card  
on your device. Select this mode when you want to use your storage card as  
a USB thumb drive. This connection type lets you copy files between your  
device’s storage card and your computer faster.  
When Disk Drive mode is enabled while your device is connected to the  
computer:  
You will not be able to use your device to access files from the storage  
card or run applications that are installed on the storage card while the  
device is connected to your computer.  
 
Getting Started 45  
Your computer will only connect to the device’s storage card. When you  
access your device from the computer, you will only see the contents of  
the device’s storage card.  
Internet Sharing  
When you do not have Internet access on your computer, you can select  
this mode to use your device as a modem for your computer. For more  
information about using Internet Sharing, see “Using Your Device as a Modem  
(Internet Sharing)in Chapter 8.  
4ꢂ Getting Started  
48 Using Phone Features  
2.1 Using the Phone  
Like a standard mobile phone, you can use your device to make, receive, and keep  
track of calls and send messages.  
The Phone screen  
To open the Phone screen, do one of the following:  
On the Home screen, tap Phone.  
Tap Start > Phone.  
Press the TALK/SEND button.  
TALK/SEND  
button  
Enter your PIN  
Most SIM cards are preset with a PIN (personal identification number) that is  
provided by your wireless service provider.  
1. Enter the preset PIN assigned by your wireless service provider.  
2. Tap Enter.  
Note  
If you entered the wrong PIN three times, the SIM card will be blocked. If this happens,  
you can unblock it with the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key) obtained from your wireless  
service provider.  
 
Using Phone Features 49  
2.2 Making Calls  
To make a call, you can either dial a number or select a contact you want to call.  
Make a call from the Phone screen  
The Phone’s Smart Dial feature makes it quick and easy for you to place a  
call. When you start entering a phone number or contact name, Smart Dial  
automatically searches and sorts the contact entries on the SIM card, in Contacts,  
and the phone numbers in Call History (including incoming, outgoing, and missed  
calls). You can then select the desired number or contact from the filtered list.  
You can just enter the first letter of the name or number of a contact. Smart Dial will  
search for contact phone numbers and the first character of a contact name as well  
as from the character that appears after a space, dash, or underscore in a contact  
name. For example, if you tap number “ꢀon the phone keypad, which is associated  
with [a, b, and c] on the Phone keypad, contact names such as the following will  
be considered matches: “Ben Miller, George Adams, “John-Carter, Carter, Ellen,  
“Dixon, Allan, Thomas_Clark, “JaneCampbell.  
If the matching list is long and you want to narrow down the search further, enter  
another letter. Using the same example above, if you continue to tap “ꢁwhich is  
associated with [d, e, f], the matching list will be narrowed down to the following  
names: “Ben Miller, George Adams, Carter, Ellen, Dixon, Allan.  
To call a phone number or contact  
1. Press the TALK/SEND button or tap Phone on the Home screen.  
2. Begin entering the first few numbers or characters by tapping the keys on  
the Phone keypad. As you enter numbers or letters, the Smart Dial panel will  
display matches found.  
If you tapped a wrong number or character, tap  
digit or character. To erase the entire entry, tap and hold  
to erase each subsequent  
.
 
50 Using Phone Features  
Tip  
After tapping 2 keys and the number you are dialing is not found in your contacts, a  
Save to Contacts? button will appear above the keypad. Tap this button and then  
choose whether to create a new contact to save the number or to add the number to  
an existing contact.  
3. Tap to close the phone keypad and to  
see if there are more matching numbers  
or contacts in the Smart Dial panel. To  
browse through the filtered list, flick  
through the list or slide your finger up  
or down the list slowly.  
Smart Dial  
panel  
4. To call a number or contact, do one of  
the following:  
Tap the desired phone number or  
contact from the list.  
To call a different phone number  
associated with the contact, select  
the contact, then tap Menu >  
Open Contact. On the contact  
details screen, tap the number you  
want to call.  
Tips  
When in a call, use the VOLUME UP/DOWN button on the side of the device to  
adjust the phone volume.  
To send a text message to a selected contact, tap Menu > Send Text Message. For  
more information about sending text messages, see “Text Messagesin Chapter 6.  
Using Phone Features 51  
Make a call from Contacts  
On the Home screen, tap Start > Contacts to open the Contacts screen.  
Do one of the following:  
Tap the contact to open the contact details and then tap the phone number  
you want to call.  
Tap and hold the contact you want to call and then from the menu, select  
Call Work, Call Home, or Call Mobile.  
Make a call from the TouchFLO 3D Home screen  
Refer to Chapter ꢁ to learn how to make a call from the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen.  
Set the device to vibrate when the call is established  
You can set the device to vibrate once to alert you that the call has been established  
with the other party.  
1. On the Phone screen, tap Menu > Options >Advanced tab.  
2. Select the Vibrate device when connection is established check box and  
then tap OK.  
Make an emergency call  
Enter the international emergency number for your locale, and press the  
TALK/SEND button on your device.  
Tip  
Additional emergency numbers may be included in your SIM card. Contact your  
wireless service provider for details.  
Make an international call  
1. Tap and hold the number 0 key on the Phone screen until the plus (+) sign  
appears.  
The plus (+) sign replaces the international prefix of the country that you are  
calling.  
5ꢀ Using Phone Features  
2. Enter the full phone number you want to dial, and press the TALK/SEND  
button on your device. The full phone number includes the country code,  
area code (without the leading zero, if any), and phone number.  
Call voice mail  
Number 1 is generally reserved for your voice mail. Tap and hold this button on the  
Phone screen keypad to call voice mail and retrieve your voice mail messages.  
2.3 Answering and Ending Calls  
When you receive a phone call, the Incoming Voice Call screen will appear, allowing  
you to either answer or ignore the call.  
Accept or reject an incoming call  
To answer a call  
Press the TALK/SEND button.  
To reject an incoming call  
Press the END button.  
To mute the ringing sound  
To mute the ring without rejecting the call, tap Mute Ring at the bottom right side  
of the Incoming Voice Call screen.  
To reject a call and send a text message  
When you reject a call, you can choose to automatically send a text message to the  
mobile phone of the caller.  
1. On the Phone screen, tap Menu > Options > Advanced tab.  
2. Select the Reject call with text message check box.  
3. Change the default text message if needed, then tap OK.  
 
Using Phone Features 5ꢁ  
When Reject call with text message is enabled, tap Send Text when the phone  
rings to reject the call and send the text message to the caller.  
Call functions  
When a call is in progress, tap the available  
buttons on the Phone screen to put a  
call on hold, dial another contact for a  
phone conference, enter notes about the  
conversation, and more.  
Note  
When the Phone is dialing, only the  
Speaker, Mute, Note, Contacts, and  
End Call buttons can be used. Other  
buttons are disabled.  
These are the  
call functions.  
To put a call on hold  
Your device notifies you when you have another incoming call, and gives you the  
option of rejecting or accepting the call. If you are already on a call and accept the  
new call, you can choose to switch between the two callers, or set up a conference  
call between all three parties.  
1. Press the TALK/SEND button to accept the second call and put the first call on  
hold.  
2. To end the second call and return to the first call, tap End Call or press END  
on your device.  
To switch between two calls  
During a call, tap  
.
54 Using Phone Features  
To set up a conference call  
1. Either put a call on hold, and dial a second number; or, accept a second  
incoming call when you already have one in progress.  
Tip  
To dial a second number, tap  
.
on the screen.  
2. Tap  
Note  
Not all mobile phone networks support conference calling. Contact your wireless  
service provider for details.  
To turn on and off the Speakerphone  
During a call, tap  
speakerphone icon  
to toggle between turning on or off the speakerphone. The  
appears in the title bar when the speakerphone is on.  
Tip  
You can also tap and hold TALK/SEND to toggle between turning the speakerphone  
on or off.  
Warning! To avoid damage to your hearing, do not hold your device against your ear when  
the speakerphone is turned on.  
To mute the microphone during a call  
Tap  
to toggle between turning on or off the microphone. When the  
microphone is turned off, the mute icon  
appears on the screen.  
To open Notes while in a call  
Tap  
or pull out the stylus.  
To end a call  
When a call is in progress, tap End Call or press END to hang up.  
To add a new phone number to Contacts after a call  
If the phone number of the person who called is not in Contacts, you can choose to  
save the number after you hang up.  
1. On the Phone screen, tap Menu > Options > Advanced tab.  
2. Select the Add new phone number to Contacts at end of call check box,  
then tap OK.  
Using Phone Features 55  
When you enable this option, a pop-up message appears after you end the phone  
call and lets you add the phone number to Contacts.  
Check missed calls  
You will see the icon in the title bar when you missed a call. To check who the  
caller was, do one of the following:  
Tap the title bar, then tap and then tap View.  
On the TouchFLO Home tab, tap the Call History or Missed Call item. For  
more information about the TouchFLO Home tab, see “Homein Chapter ꢁ.  
On the Phone screen, tap Menu > Call History and then tap  
.
2.4 Call History  
Use Call History to check for missed  
calls, dialed numbers, and calls  
received. To open the Call History  
screen, tap Menu > Call History on  
the Phone screen.  
If you have a long list of calls in the  
Call History, tap one of the buttons  
at the bottom of the screen to filter  
the list according to the type of call.  
Missed  
Dialed  
All Calls  
Received  
5ꢂ Using Phone Features  
2.5 Speed Dial  
Use Speed Dial to call frequently-used numbers with a single tap. For example,  
if you assign a contact to the location 2 in Speed Dial, you can tap and hold the  
number 2 key on the Phone screen keypad to dial the contact’s number.  
To create a Speed Dial entry  
1. On the Phone screen, tap Menu > Speed Dial.  
2. Tap Menu > New.  
3. Tap a contact, then select the phone number of the contact that you want  
assigned to the speed dial key.  
4. In Location, select an available key to use as the speed dial key.  
5. Tap OK.  
Tips  
To create a Speed Dial entry from Contacts or SIM card contacts, tap the contact, select  
the number you want to add to Speed Dial, then tap Menu > Add to Speed Dial.  
To delete a Speed Dial entry, in the Speed Dial list, tap and hold the desired entry,  
then tap Delete.  
2.6 Video Call  
Your device lets you make video calls when you are within a ꢁG network coverage  
area. You need to use a ꢁG-enabled SIM card to make video calls.  
Make a video call  
Do one of the following:  
On the Phone keypad, tap the phone number to call, then tap  
Menu > Video Call to start a video call.  
On the Phone screen, tap the phone number to call, tap  
Video Call button.  
, then tap the  
 
Using Phone Features 5ꢃ  
From Contacts, tap and hold the desired contact, and tap Video Call.  
From Call History, tap and hold the desired phone number or contact, and tap  
Video Call.  
Note  
The other party’s image will appear on the screen about ꢁ to 5 seconds after a  
connection is established, depending on the signal strength. The streaming images  
quality may also be influenced by the signal.  
When the video call is unsuccessful, a message pops up asking you if you want to  
try again, make a voice call instead, or send an SMS/MMS message.  
Change the video call settings  
While on a video call, you can change certain settings such as the size of the image,  
brightness of the video image, the camera to use, and more.  
The following shows the Video Call screen and control buttons during an ongoing  
call.  
1
Image display area. Displays your image  
and the other party's image, depending on  
the selected Swap View setting.  
2
Camera. Tap to toggle between turning on/  
off the camera. When the camera is turned  
off, the image displayed depends on the  
Video Call options you have set. See “Video  
call optionsfor details.  
1
3
4
Main/Second. Tap to toggle between using  
the Main (back) and Second (front) camera.  
5
4
Swap View. Tap to toggle between the ꢀ  
view options. You can choose to have the  
other party’s image small or large.  
2
3
5
Status area. Displays phone number or  
contact name and call timer.  
 
58 Using Phone Features  
Brightness  
To adjust the brightness of the live image, tap  
Menu > Brightness during a video call.  
A brightness bar appears on the screen.  
Drag the slider to the right to increase the  
brightness or to the left to decrease the  
brightness of the live image.  
Note  
You cannot adjust the brightness for a still  
image.  
Video call options  
On the Phone screen, or on the screen of the  
ongoing video call, you can also tap  
Menu > Video Call Options and set the  
following options:  
Brightness bar  
General tab  
Show still image. Select the image you want to display when you turn off the  
camera.  
Preset (female). Displays a female picture in place of your image.  
Preset (male). Displays a male picture in place of your image.  
Custom image. Lets you use an image file as your display picture. When  
this option is selected, the File Name box and the Browse button will be  
enabled, allowing you to select an image file.  
Last video frame. Uses the last video frame before you stopped the  
camera as your display image.  
Using Phone Features 59  
Video screen preference. Change how  
your image and the other party’s image  
are displayed on the screen, select  
your preference from the Video screen  
preference list or tap the View button on  
the Video Call screen.  
Camera options:  
Flip the 2nd Camera video. Select this  
check box if you are going to show a  
text document to the other party using  
the second camera.  
Switch camera off when answering  
video call. Select this check box to not  
send a video feed of yourself to the  
other party when answering a video  
call. Instead, the option you selected in  
Show still image will be displayed.  
Video Call Options: General tab  
Switch camera off when making video call. Select this check box to not  
send a video feed of yourself to the other party when making a video call.  
Instead, the option you selected in Show still image will be displayed.  
Display info:  
Show call timer. Select this check box to display the call period in the  
status area.  
Show phone number or name. Select this check box to display the other  
party’s phone number or name in the status area.  
Services tab  
To set up further calling options for Video Call, tap the Services tab. On the Services  
screen, select the desired service from the list, then tap Get Settings to access its  
settings.  
ꢂ0 Using Phone Features  
Accept or reject an incoming video call  
When you receive a video call, the Incoming Voice Call screen will appear, allowing  
you to either answer or ignore the call.  
To answer an incoming video call  
Press the TALK/SEND button.  
To reject an incoming voice call  
Press the END button.  
To mute the ringing sound  
To mute the ring without rejecting the video call, tap Mute Ring at the bottom  
right side of the Incoming Video Call screen.  
To reject an incoming video call and send a text message  
When Reject call with text message is enabled, tap Send Text when the phone  
rings to reject the video call and send the text message to the caller. For more  
information, see “Accept or reject an incoming callearlier in this chapter.  
2.7 Turn the Phone Function On and Off  
In many countries, you are required by law to turn off the phone while on board an  
aircraft.  
To enable or disable the phone function  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Comm Manager.  
2. On the Comm Manager screen, tap the Phone button to enable or disable  
the phone function. When enabled, the ON indicator is activated.  
Using Phone Features ꢂ1  
To enable or disable Airplane Mode  
Another way to turn off the phone function is to switch your device to Airplane  
Mode. When you enable Airplane Mode, all wireless radios on your device are  
turned off, including the phone function, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi.  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Comm Manager.  
2. On the Comm Manager screen, tap the Airplane Mode button to enable or  
disable Airplane Mode. When enabled, the ON indicator is activated.  
When you disable Airplane Mode, the phone function is turned back on and the  
previous state of Bluetooth and Wi-Fi are restored.  
2.8 Setting Up Bluetooth SIM Access for Car Kit Phones  
Bluetooth car kits that support the SIM Access Profile (SAP) can connect to your  
device and access its SIM card via Bluetooth. Once a SAP connection has been  
established, you can download SIM contacts from your device to the car kit phone.  
You can also use the car kit phone to answer and make calls using your device’s SIM  
card.  
Note  
To enable downloading contacts onto the car kit, ensure that all contacts on the  
device are stored in the SIM card and not in the device memory. Configure the car kit  
to download contacts only from the SIM card.  
1. On your device, make sure that Bluetooth is turned on and set to visible  
mode. For information about turning on Bluetooth and enabling visible  
mode, see “Bluetooth Modesin Chapter 9.  
2. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap Menu >  
Bluetooth Devices > SIM Access tab.  
3. Select the Remote SIM Access check box, then tap OK.  
4. Connect the car kit phone to your device via Bluetooth. To learn how to  
connect, consult your car kit phone’s manual.  
ꢂꢀ Using Phone Features  
5. If this is the first time you are pairing the car kit phone with your device, enter  
the car kit’s passcode on your device.  
6. A pop-up message should appear on your device saying that a connection  
has been established between your device and car kit phone. Tap OK.  
Note  
You will not be able to make/receive calls, send/receive messages or perform related  
activities on your device when the SIM Access Profile connection is active. You’ll be  
able to do all these from the car kit phone during this time. After the connection is  
disconnected, you will be able to use your device as before.  
 
64ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
3.1 About TouchFLO™ 3D  
TouchFLO™ 3DꢀgivesꢀyouꢀtouchꢀcontrolꢀoverꢀyourꢀWindowsꢀMobile-poweredꢀ  
device.ꢀTouchFLOꢀ3Dꢀprovidesꢀtheꢀfollowingꢀfeatures:  
AꢀHomeꢀscreenꢀthatꢀallowsꢀfinger-touchꢀaccessꢀtoꢀtheꢀmostꢀwidely-usedꢀ  
functions,ꢀsuchꢀasꢀPeople,ꢀMessages,ꢀMail,ꢀMusic,ꢀInternet,ꢀandꢀmore  
Allowsꢀyouꢀtoꢀuseꢀfingerꢀgesturesꢀtoꢀnavigateꢀscreens  
3.2 Using the TouchFLO 3D Home Screen  
TheꢀTouchFLOꢀ3DꢀHomeꢀscreenꢀhaveꢀtheꢀfollowingꢀtabs:  
Home  
Internet  
PhotosꢀandꢀVideos  
Weather Programs  
Music Settings  
People  
Mail  
Stock  
Messages  
 
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 65  
To switch between the tabs of the Home screen  
Doꢀoneꢀofꢀtheꢀfollowing:  
TouchꢀorꢀtapꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀtabꢀonꢀtheꢀHomeꢀscreen.  
Pressꢀandꢀholdꢀyourꢀfingerꢀonꢀtheꢀactiveꢀtab,ꢀthenꢀslideꢀyourꢀfingerꢀrightꢀorꢀleftꢀ  
overꢀtheꢀtabs.ꢀReleaseꢀwhenꢀyouꢀhaveꢀselectedꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀtab.  
Noteꢀ Applyꢀsomeꢀpressureꢀwhenꢀpressingꢀandꢀholdingꢀonꢀtheꢀactiveꢀtabꢀtoꢀbeꢀableꢀtoꢀ  
slideꢀoverꢀtheꢀtabs.  
66ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
Swipeꢀleftꢀacrossꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀmoveꢀtoꢀtheꢀnextꢀtab,ꢀandꢀswipeꢀrightꢀacrossꢀ  
theꢀscreenꢀtoꢀmoveꢀtoꢀtheꢀpreviousꢀtab.  
To move or remove a TouchFLO 3D Home screen tab  
YouꢀcanꢀmoveꢀorꢀremoveꢀaꢀTouchFLOꢀ3DꢀHomeꢀscreenꢀtabꢀaccordingꢀtoꢀyourꢀ  
preference.  
Noteꢀ  
YouꢀcannotꢀmoveꢀorꢀremoveꢀtheꢀHomeꢀtab.ꢀYouꢀcanꢀonlyꢀmoveꢀtheꢀSettingsꢀtab.  
1. OnꢀtheꢀHomeꢀscreen,ꢀslideꢀyourꢀfingerꢀtoꢀtheꢀSettingsꢀtab,ꢀthenꢀtouchꢀ  
Customize Tabs.  
2. Doꢀanyꢀofꢀtheꢀfollowing:  
ꢀ Toꢀmoveꢀaꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀandꢀholdꢀtheꢀiconꢀbeforeꢀtheꢀtabꢀname,ꢀthenꢀdragꢀ  
itꢀupꢀorꢀdownꢀtheꢀtabsꢀlist.ꢀReleaseꢀtheꢀiconꢀwhenꢀyouꢀreachꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀ  
location.  
ꢀ Toꢀremoveꢀaꢀtab,ꢀclearꢀtheꢀcheckꢀboxꢀatꢀtheꢀrightꢀofꢀtheꢀtabꢀname.  
3. TouchꢀDone.  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 67  
Home  
TheꢀHomeꢀtabꢀdisplaysꢀtheꢀcurrentꢀdate,ꢀaꢀflip-styleꢀclock,ꢀandꢀanꢀAlarmꢀiconꢀthatꢀ  
indicatesꢀwhetherꢀtheꢀalarmꢀisꢀonꢀorꢀoff.ꢀMissedꢀcallsꢀandꢀyourꢀupcomingꢀcalendarꢀ  
appointmentsꢀareꢀalsoꢀshownꢀonꢀtheꢀHomeꢀtab.ꢀToꢀselectꢀanꢀitemꢀonꢀtheꢀHomeꢀtab,ꢀ  
touchꢀtheꢀitem.  
Touchꢀtheꢀdateꢀorꢀtheꢀ  
flipꢀclockꢀtoꢀopenꢀtheꢀ  
Clockꢀ&ꢀAlarmsꢀscreenꢀ  
whereꢀyouꢀcanꢀsetꢀtheꢀ  
Swipeꢀupwardꢀ  
date,ꢀtime,ꢀandꢀalarm.ꢀ  
onꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀ  
(SeeꢀChapterꢀ13ꢀforꢀ  
displayꢀtheꢀsmallerꢀ  
details.)  
digitalꢀclockꢀ  
andꢀviewꢀmoreꢀ  
appointments.  
Touchꢀthisꢀareaꢀtoꢀ  
viewꢀdetailsꢀaboutꢀ  
missedꢀcallsꢀinꢀtheꢀ  
CallꢀHistory.  
(SeeꢀChapterꢀ2ꢀforꢀ  
details.)  
Homeꢀtabꢀwithꢀflipꢀclock  
Oneꢀall-dayꢀappointmentꢀ  
andꢀupꢀtoꢀtwoꢀtimedꢀꢀ  
appointmentsꢀcanꢀbeꢀ  
displayed.ꢀTouchꢀthisꢀareaꢀ  
toꢀcreate,ꢀeditꢀorꢀviewꢀanꢀ  
appointment.  
Swipeꢀ  
downwardꢀonꢀ  
theꢀscreenꢀtoꢀ  
changeꢀbackꢀtoꢀ  
theꢀflipꢀclock.  
(Seeꢀ“Calendar”ꢀinꢀChapterꢀ  
12ꢀforꢀdetails.)  
Homeꢀtabꢀwithꢀsmallerꢀdigitalꢀclock  
68ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
People  
Onꢀthe Peopleꢀtab,ꢀyouꢀcanꢀaddꢀfavoriteꢀcontactsꢀwhoꢀyouꢀmostꢀfrequentlyꢀ  
communicateꢀwith.ꢀThisꢀallowsꢀyouꢀtoꢀquicklyꢀmakeꢀcalls,ꢀsendꢀtextꢀmessages,ꢀandꢀ  
sendꢀe-mailsꢀtoꢀyourꢀfavoriteꢀcontacts.  
Tipꢀ  
Youꢀcanꢀaddꢀupꢀtoꢀ15ꢀfavoriteꢀcontactsꢀonꢀtheꢀPeopleꢀtab.  
To add favorite contacts  
Youꢀshouldꢀalreadyꢀhaveꢀcreatedꢀorꢀsynchronizedꢀcontactsꢀonꢀyourꢀdeviceꢀbeforeꢀ  
youꢀcanꢀaddꢀthemꢀtoꢀtheꢀPeopleꢀtab.  
1. OnꢀtheꢀHomeꢀscreen,ꢀslideꢀyourꢀfingerꢀtoꢀtheꢀPeopleꢀtab.  
2. Touchꢀtheꢀbigꢀplusꢀ(+)ꢀicon,ꢀorꢀtouchꢀ  
Add Favorite.  
3. OnꢀtheꢀSelectꢀaꢀContactꢀscreen,ꢀtouchꢀtheꢀ  
nameꢀofꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀcontact.  
TipsToꢀcreateꢀaꢀnewꢀcontact,ꢀtouchꢀMenu >  
New Contact.ꢀSeeꢀ“Contacts”ꢀinꢀChapterꢀ  
12ꢀforꢀdetails.  
SIMꢀcontactsꢀcannotꢀbeꢀaddedꢀasꢀfavoriteꢀ  
contacts.  
4. Selectꢀaꢀphoneꢀnumberꢀorꢀe-mailꢀaddressꢀtoꢀ  
associateꢀtoꢀtheꢀfavoriteꢀcontact.  
Noteꢀ Ifꢀthereꢀisꢀnoꢀpictureꢀassociatedꢀwithꢀtheꢀ  
contact,ꢀtheꢀnextꢀscreenꢀpromptsꢀyouꢀtoꢀ  
assignꢀaꢀpictureꢀtoꢀtheꢀcontact.  
5. Toꢀaddꢀanotherꢀfavoriteꢀcontact,ꢀtouchꢀtheꢀsmallꢀPlusꢀiconꢀ(ꢀ ꢀ)ꢀatꢀtheꢀrightꢀ  
sideꢀofꢀtheꢀscreenꢀandꢀrepeatꢀstepsꢀ3ꢀandꢀ4.  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 69  
To choose from your favorite contacts  
Doꢀanyꢀofꢀtheꢀfollowing:  
Toꢀflipꢀthroughꢀtheꢀcontactꢀpicturesꢀoneꢀatꢀaꢀ  
time,ꢀswipeꢀyourꢀfingerꢀupꢀorꢀdownꢀtheꢀscreen.  
Onꢀtheꢀpictureꢀstripꢀatꢀtheꢀrightꢀsideꢀofꢀtheꢀ  
Peopleꢀscreen:  
Touchꢀtheꢀpictureꢀofꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀfavoriteꢀ  
contact;ꢀor  
Pressꢀandꢀholdꢀonꢀtheꢀcurrentlyꢀselectedꢀ  
contactꢀpictureꢀtoꢀdisplayꢀaꢀslide-outꢀbar,ꢀ  
andꢀthenꢀslideꢀupꢀorꢀdownꢀtheꢀpictureꢀ  
strip.ꢀReleaseꢀyourꢀfingerꢀwhenꢀtheꢀ  
desiredꢀfavoriteꢀcontactꢀisꢀselected.  
70ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
Afterꢀselectingꢀaꢀfavoriteꢀcontact,ꢀtouchꢀanꢀiconꢀbelowꢀtheꢀcontactꢀnameꢀtoꢀ  
callꢀorꢀtoꢀcomposeꢀandꢀsendꢀaꢀtextꢀorꢀanꢀe-mailꢀmessageꢀtoꢀtheꢀcontact.  
Touchꢀtoꢀcallꢀ  
theꢀcontact.  
Touchꢀtoꢀcallꢀtheꢀcontact’sꢀ  
work/officeꢀphone.  
Touchꢀtoꢀcomposeꢀandꢀ  
sendꢀanꢀe-mailꢀmessage.  
Touchꢀtoꢀcallꢀtheꢀcontact’sꢀ Touchꢀtoꢀcomposeꢀandꢀ  
homeꢀphone. sendꢀaꢀtextꢀmessage.  
Theꢀiconsꢀshownꢀwillꢀdependꢀonꢀavailableꢀcontactꢀinformation.ꢀForꢀexample,ꢀ  
(ꢀ ꢀ)ꢀwillꢀbeꢀshownꢀifꢀtheꢀcontact’sꢀhomeꢀphoneꢀisꢀspecified.  
Touchꢀtheꢀpictureꢀofꢀtheꢀcontactꢀonꢀtheꢀcenterꢀscreenꢀtoꢀaccessꢀhisꢀorꢀherꢀ  
contactꢀcard.ꢀOnꢀtheꢀcontactꢀcard,ꢀyouꢀwillꢀseeꢀtheꢀlastꢀoutgoingꢀorꢀincomingꢀ  
callꢀasꢀwellꢀasꢀcontactꢀdetailsꢀsuchꢀasꢀphoneꢀnumbers,ꢀe-mailꢀaddress,ꢀandꢀ  
more.  
Tipsꢀ  
OnꢀtheꢀPeopleꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀAll PeopleꢀtoꢀaccessꢀSIMꢀcontactsꢀandꢀꢀallꢀcontactsꢀthatꢀ  
areꢀstoredꢀonꢀyourꢀdevice.  
Toꢀremoveꢀtheꢀcurrentꢀfavoriteꢀcontact,ꢀtouchꢀMenu > Remove Favorite.  
Messages  
OnꢀtheꢀMessagesꢀtab,ꢀyouꢀcanꢀreadꢀSMSꢀtextꢀmessagesꢀasꢀtheyꢀarriveꢀandꢀcreateꢀaꢀ  
newꢀSMSꢀtextꢀmessage.  
Whenꢀthereꢀareꢀnewꢀincomingꢀtextꢀmessages,ꢀtheꢀiconꢀonꢀtheꢀMessagesꢀtabꢀwillꢀ  
showꢀtheꢀnumberꢀofꢀnewꢀmessages.ꢀForꢀexample,ꢀ  
messageꢀreceived.  
ꢀindicatesꢀthatꢀthereꢀisꢀaꢀnewꢀ  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 71  
Touchꢀthisꢀiconꢀtoꢀcreateꢀ  
aꢀnewꢀSMSꢀtextꢀmessage.  
Toꢀviewꢀtheꢀentireꢀ  
messageꢀthreadꢀfromꢀtheꢀ  
senderꢀandꢀreply,ꢀtouchꢀ  
theꢀmessageꢀonꢀtheꢀ  
screen.ꢀ  
Toꢀflipꢀthroughꢀreceivedꢀ  
textꢀmessages,ꢀswipeꢀ  
yourꢀfingerꢀupward/  
downward,ꢀtouchꢀtheꢀ  
Up/Downꢀarrowꢀonꢀtheꢀ  
screen.  
Touchꢀtoꢀaccessꢀallꢀtextꢀ  
messagesꢀinꢀyourꢀinboxꢀ  
andꢀotherꢀfolders.  
Touchꢀtoꢀremoveꢀtheꢀ  
currentꢀmessageꢀandꢀ  
accessꢀmoreꢀoptions.  
Forꢀmoreꢀinformationꢀaboutꢀworkingꢀwithꢀtextꢀmessages,ꢀseeꢀ“TextꢀMessages”ꢀinꢀ  
Chapterꢀ6.  
Mail  
TheꢀMailꢀtabꢀisꢀwhereꢀyouꢀsendꢀandꢀreceiveꢀe-mailꢀmessages.ꢀIncludingꢀOutlookꢀE-  
mail,ꢀyouꢀcanꢀaddꢀupꢀtoꢀfourꢀPOP3/IMAP4ꢀandꢀweb-basedꢀe-mailꢀaccountsꢀinꢀthisꢀtab.  
To add an e-mail account  
1. OnꢀtheꢀHomeꢀscreen,ꢀslideꢀyourꢀfingerꢀtoꢀtheꢀMailꢀtab.  
2. Ifꢀthisꢀisꢀyourꢀfirstꢀtimeꢀtoꢀaddꢀanꢀe-mailꢀaccount,ꢀtouchꢀNew Accountꢀonꢀtheꢀ  
bottom-rightꢀsideꢀofꢀtheꢀscreen.  
3. Setꢀupꢀyourꢀe-mailꢀaccountꢀusingꢀtheꢀE-mailꢀSetupꢀwizard.  
4. Toꢀaddꢀanotherꢀe-mailꢀaccount,ꢀtouchꢀMenu > Accounts > New Accountꢀandꢀ  
useꢀtheꢀE-mailꢀSetupꢀwizardꢀtoꢀsetꢀupꢀyourꢀaccount.  
Forꢀdetailedꢀinstructionsꢀonꢀsettingꢀupꢀe-mailꢀaccountsꢀusingꢀtheꢀE-mailꢀSetupꢀ  
wizard,ꢀseeꢀChapterꢀ6.  
72ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
To check e-mail  
Whenꢀthereꢀareꢀnewꢀe-mails,ꢀtheꢀiconꢀonꢀtheꢀMailꢀtabꢀandꢀtheꢀrespectiveꢀiconsꢀofꢀ  
theꢀe-mailꢀaccountsꢀwillꢀshowꢀtheꢀnumberꢀofꢀnewlyꢀreceivedꢀmessages.  
Afterꢀselectingꢀanꢀe-mailꢀ  
account,ꢀtouchꢀthisꢀiconꢀ  
toꢀcreateꢀandꢀsendꢀaꢀnewꢀ  
e-mailꢀmessage.  
Toꢀbrowseꢀthroughꢀ  
receivedꢀe-mails,ꢀ  
swipeꢀupꢀorꢀdownꢀonꢀ  
theꢀenvelopeꢀimage.  
Touchꢀtheꢀe-mailꢀ  
onꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀ  
openꢀandꢀreadꢀtheꢀ  
message.ꢀ  
Theseꢀareꢀyourꢀe-mailꢀ  
accounts.ꢀTouchꢀanꢀ  
iconꢀtoꢀselectꢀanꢀe-mailꢀ  
accountꢀandꢀviewꢀtheꢀ  
newꢀe-mailsꢀreceivedꢀinꢀ  
thatꢀaccount.  
Touchꢀtoꢀaccessꢀallꢀ  
e-mailꢀmessagesꢀofꢀ  
theꢀcurrentlyꢀselectedꢀ  
account.  
Touchꢀtoꢀaccess  
moreꢀoptions.  
Forꢀmoreꢀinformationꢀaboutꢀworkingꢀwithꢀe-mails,ꢀseeꢀChapterꢀ6ꢀandꢀ7.  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 73  
Internet  
OnꢀtheꢀInternetꢀtab,ꢀyouꢀcanꢀopenꢀOperaꢀMobile™ꢀtoꢀbrowseꢀtheꢀwebꢀandꢀaddꢀwebꢀ  
favoritesꢀforꢀone-touchꢀaccessꢀtoꢀyourꢀfavoriteꢀwebꢀsites.  
Touchꢀhereꢀtoꢀbrowseꢀtheꢀ  
Swipeꢀupwardꢀtoꢀ  
webꢀusingꢀOperaꢀMobile.  
scrollꢀdownꢀtheꢀ  
screenꢀandꢀaccessꢀ  
moreꢀwebꢀfavorites.  
TouchꢀtoꢀopenꢀOperaꢀMobileꢀ  
andꢀadd,ꢀviewꢀorꢀdeleteꢀwebꢀ  
favorites.  
ForꢀmoreꢀinformationꢀaboutꢀusingꢀOperaꢀMobile,ꢀseeꢀChapterꢀ8.  
Stock  
TheꢀStockꢀtabꢀallowsꢀyouꢀtoꢀadd,ꢀview,ꢀandꢀanalyzeꢀstocksꢀandꢀstockꢀmarketꢀ  
movementsꢀusingꢀupdatedꢀfinancialꢀinformation.  
Noteꢀ  
Dependingꢀonꢀyourꢀdataꢀdownloadꢀsettings,ꢀyouꢀcanꢀsetꢀtheꢀdeviceꢀtoꢀautomaticallyꢀ  
connectꢀtoꢀtheꢀInternetꢀviaꢀ3G/GPRSꢀdataꢀconnectionꢀtoꢀdownloadꢀstockꢀorꢀstockꢀ  
marketꢀinformationꢀeverytimeꢀyouꢀselectꢀtheꢀStock tab.ꢀThisꢀmayꢀincurꢀadditionalꢀfeesꢀ  
fromꢀyourꢀwirelessꢀserviceꢀprovider.ꢀSeeꢀ“Toꢀsetꢀtheꢀstockꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀinformationꢀ  
download”ꢀlaterꢀinꢀthisꢀchapterꢀforꢀdetails.  
74ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
To add a stock or stock market quote  
1. OnꢀtheꢀHomeꢀscreen,ꢀslideꢀyourꢀfingerꢀtoꢀtheꢀStockꢀtab.  
2. Touchꢀtheꢀbigꢀplusꢀ(+)ꢀiconꢀorꢀtouchꢀQuote.  
3. OnꢀtheꢀQuoteꢀscreen,ꢀenterꢀtheꢀcompanyꢀname,ꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindex,ꢀorꢀtickerꢀ  
symbolꢀinꢀtheꢀsearchꢀbox,ꢀthenꢀtapꢀ ꢀ.  
Tipꢀ  
Swipeꢀupwardꢀtoꢀscrollꢀdownꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀviewꢀmoreꢀsearchꢀresults.  
4. Tapꢀ ꢀatꢀtheꢀrightꢀsideꢀofꢀtheꢀcompanyꢀname,ꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindex,ꢀorꢀtickerꢀ  
symbolꢀtoꢀdisplayꢀitꢀonꢀtheꢀStockꢀtab.  
Noteꢀ Whenꢀintradayꢀtradingꢀinformationꢀforꢀtheꢀstockꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindexꢀyouꢀ  
quotedꢀisꢀnotꢀavailable,ꢀtheꢀStockꢀtabꢀwillꢀdisplayꢀaꢀblankꢀchartꢀwithꢀtheꢀstockꢀ  
orꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindexꢀname,ꢀlastꢀtradeꢀpriceꢀorꢀvolume,ꢀandꢀtheꢀchangeꢀinꢀtradeꢀ  
priceꢀorꢀvolumeꢀfromꢀtheꢀpreviousꢀtradingꢀday.  
5. Toꢀaddꢀanotherꢀstockꢀquoteꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindex,ꢀrepeatꢀstepsꢀ2ꢀtoꢀ4.  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 75  
TipsYouꢀcanꢀaddꢀupꢀtoꢀ14ꢀstockꢀquotesꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindicesꢀonꢀtheꢀStockꢀtab.  
SelectedꢀstockꢀquotesꢀareꢀautomaticallyꢀaddedꢀtoꢀMy Portfolio,ꢀwhileꢀselectedꢀ  
stockꢀmarketꢀindicesꢀareꢀautomaticallyꢀaddedꢀtoꢀMarket Summary.ꢀSeeꢀ“Toꢀ  
manageꢀyourꢀstockꢀportfolioꢀorꢀmarketꢀsummaries”ꢀlaterꢀinꢀthisꢀchapterꢀforꢀdetails.  
To view stock quotes or stock market indices  
TheꢀStockꢀtabꢀdisplaysꢀaꢀstockꢀquoteꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindexꢀinꢀanꢀintradayꢀchartꢀthatꢀ  
showsꢀtheꢀtradingꢀtimeꢀandꢀprice,ꢀtheꢀstockꢀquoteꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindex,ꢀcurrentꢀpriceꢀ  
orꢀvolume,ꢀandꢀtheꢀchangeꢀinꢀpriceꢀorꢀvolume.ꢀTheꢀcolorꢀbandꢀonꢀtheꢀleftꢀofꢀtheꢀstockꢀ  
orꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindexꢀnameꢀorꢀbuttonꢀindicatesꢀwhetherꢀitꢀhasꢀgainedꢀ(green)ꢀorꢀ  
declinedꢀ(red).ꢀToꢀviewꢀtheꢀstockꢀquoteꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindexꢀdetails,ꢀtouchꢀtheꢀchart.  
Showsꢀtheꢀlastꢀinformationꢀupdate.ꢀ  
Touchꢀthisꢀareaꢀtoꢀdownloadꢀtheꢀlatestꢀ  
stock/stockꢀmarketꢀinformation.  
Colorꢀbandꢀindicator  
Touchꢀtoꢀaddꢀanotherꢀstockꢀ  
orꢀstockꢀmarketꢀquote.  
Toꢀdisplayꢀtheꢀchartꢀofꢀ  
theꢀnextꢀorꢀpreviousꢀstockꢀ  
quoteꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀ  
indexꢀinꢀtheꢀlist,ꢀswipeꢀyourꢀ  
fingerꢀupward/downwardꢀ  
onꢀtheꢀscreen,ꢀorꢀtouchꢀ  
theꢀstockꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀ  
indexꢀbutton.  
Touchꢀtheꢀchartꢀtoꢀopenꢀ  
theꢀStockꢀDetailsꢀscreen.  
Touchꢀtoꢀviewꢀallꢀstocksꢀ  
andꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindicesꢀ  
youꢀareꢀmonitoringꢀinꢀ  
theꢀMy Portfolioꢀorꢀ  
Market Summary.  
Touchꢀtoꢀdownloadꢀtheꢀ  
latestꢀstock/stockꢀmarketꢀ  
information.  
Touchꢀtoꢀreturnꢀ  
toꢀtheꢀStockꢀtab.  
76ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
To manage your stock portfolio or market summaries  
1. OnꢀtheꢀStockꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀView All,ꢀthenꢀtouchꢀ ꢀtoꢀdisplayꢀtheꢀMy Portfolioꢀ  
screen.ꢀMyꢀPortfolioꢀlistsꢀallꢀyourꢀstockꢀquotes.ꢀTouchꢀMenuꢀtoꢀadd,ꢀdelete,ꢀorꢀ  
rearrangeꢀyourꢀstockꢀquotes.  
2. OnꢀtheꢀMyꢀPortfolioꢀscreen,ꢀtouchꢀ  
ꢀtoꢀdisplayꢀtheꢀMarket Summaryꢀ  
screen.ꢀMarketꢀSummaryꢀlistsꢀallꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindicesꢀwhichꢀyouꢀareꢀ  
monitoring.ꢀ  
TouchꢀMenuꢀtoꢀadd,ꢀdelete,ꢀorꢀrearrangeꢀyourꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindices.  
Touchꢀaꢀstockꢀorꢀstockꢀ  
marketꢀindexꢀtoꢀopenꢀtheꢀ  
StockꢀDetailsꢀscreen.  
Ifꢀtheꢀstock/stockꢀmarketꢀ  
indicesꢀlistꢀisꢀlong,ꢀswipeꢀ  
yourꢀfingerꢀupward/  
downwardꢀonꢀtheꢀscreenꢀ  
toꢀviewꢀmore.  
Touchꢀtoꢀadd,ꢀ  
delete,ꢀorꢀrearrangeꢀ  
yourꢀstock/stockꢀ  
marketꢀquotes.  
TouchꢀtoꢀreturnꢀtoꢀtheꢀStockꢀtab.  
To set the stock or stock market information download  
1. OnꢀtheꢀStockꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀView All > Menu > Settings.  
2. Youꢀcanꢀchooseꢀfromꢀtheꢀfollowingꢀdownloadꢀoptions:  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 77  
Download data automatically.ꢀWhenꢀselected,ꢀstockꢀand/orꢀstockꢀmarketꢀ  
indexꢀdataꢀisꢀautomaticallyꢀdownloadedꢀfromꢀtheꢀYahoo!ꢀFinanceꢀwebꢀ  
siteꢀwheneverꢀyouꢀselectꢀtheꢀStockꢀtab.ꢀYouꢀcanꢀalsoꢀsetꢀtheꢀtimeꢀforꢀtheꢀ  
deviceꢀtoꢀconnectꢀautomaticallyꢀandꢀupdateꢀstockꢀorꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindexꢀ  
informationꢀwhenꢀyouꢀenableꢀthisꢀoption.ꢀStockꢀandꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindexꢀ  
informationꢀisꢀalsoꢀdownloadedꢀeveryꢀtimeꢀanꢀActiveSyncꢀconnectionꢀ  
isꢀestablishedꢀ(throughꢀover-the-airꢀorꢀUSBꢀconnections).ꢀThisꢀoptionꢀisꢀ  
selectedꢀbyꢀdefault.ꢀ  
Clearꢀthisꢀoptionꢀifꢀyouꢀpreferꢀtoꢀmanuallyꢀdownloadꢀstockꢀand/orꢀstockꢀ  
marketꢀindexꢀinformation.  
Download data when roaming.ꢀSelectꢀthisꢀoptionꢀonlyꢀifꢀyouꢀwantꢀtoꢀ  
allowꢀautomaticꢀdownloadꢀofꢀstockꢀand/orꢀstockꢀmarketꢀindexꢀinformationꢀ  
whenꢀroaming.ꢀThisꢀmayꢀincurꢀadditionalꢀcosts.  
Photos and Videos  
TheꢀPhotos and Videosꢀtabꢀletsꢀyouꢀvisuallyꢀflipꢀthroughꢀyourꢀphotosꢀandꢀvideoꢀ  
clipsꢀandꢀviewꢀthemꢀinꢀfullꢀscreen.ꢀFromꢀthisꢀtab,ꢀyouꢀcanꢀalsoꢀactivateꢀtheꢀCameraꢀ  
soꢀyouꢀcanꢀtakeꢀpicturesꢀandꢀrecordꢀvideoꢀclips.  
TheꢀPhotos and Videosꢀtabꢀdisplaysꢀpicturesꢀandꢀvideoꢀfilesꢀfromꢀtheꢀcurrentꢀ  
favoriteꢀalbum.ꢀByꢀdefault,ꢀtheꢀCameraꢀShotsꢀalbumꢀwhichꢀstoresꢀtheꢀpicturesꢀandꢀ  
videosꢀthatꢀyouꢀcapturedꢀusingꢀtheꢀdeviceꢀcameraꢀisꢀsetꢀasꢀtheꢀfavorite.ꢀYouꢀcanꢀ  
changeꢀtoꢀanotherꢀfavoriteꢀalbum,ꢀifꢀpreferred.  
To set an album as a Favorite  
1. OnꢀtheꢀPhotosꢀandꢀVideosꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀAlbumꢀtoꢀopenꢀtheꢀAlbumꢀprogram.  
2. TouchꢀAlbumsꢀandꢀthenꢀselectꢀoneꢀofꢀtheꢀlistedꢀfavoriteꢀalbums.  
3. TapꢀMenu > Set Album as Favorite.ꢀandꢀthenꢀtapꢀOKꢀonꢀtheꢀconfirmationꢀ  
screen.  
78ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
To view photos and videos  
Touchꢀhereꢀtoꢀtakeꢀaꢀphoto.  
Touchꢀhereꢀtoꢀshootꢀvideo.  
Touchꢀtheꢀphotoꢀorꢀ  
videoꢀonꢀtheꢀscreenꢀ  
toꢀviewꢀorꢀplayꢀitꢀinꢀ  
fullꢀscreen.ꢀ  
Toꢀflipꢀthroughꢀphotosꢀ  
andꢀvideos,ꢀswipeꢀ  
upward/downwardꢀonꢀ  
theꢀscreenꢀorꢀtouchꢀtheꢀ  
Up/Downꢀarrow.  
Touchꢀhereꢀtoꢀopenꢀ  
theꢀAlbumꢀprogram.ꢀ  
(Seeꢀ“ViewingꢀPhotosꢀ  
andꢀVideosꢀUsingꢀ  
Album”ꢀinꢀChapterꢀ11ꢀ  
forꢀdetails.)  
Touchꢀtoꢀviewꢀtheꢀ  
photosꢀasꢀaꢀslideshow.ꢀ  
Ifꢀaꢀvideoꢀisꢀselected,ꢀ  
touchꢀPlay.  
Tipsꢀ  
Forꢀmoreꢀinformationꢀaboutꢀviewingꢀinꢀfullꢀscreen,ꢀseeꢀ“Viewꢀanꢀimage”ꢀandꢀ“Playꢀ  
backꢀvideo”ꢀinꢀChapterꢀ11.ꢀTheꢀfileꢀformatsꢀthatꢀcanꢀbeꢀviewedꢀonꢀtheꢀPhotos and  
VideosꢀtabꢀareꢀtheꢀsameꢀasꢀtheꢀAlbumꢀprogram.  
ToꢀtransferꢀmediaꢀfilesꢀfromꢀaꢀcomputerꢀandꢀviewꢀthemꢀonꢀtheꢀPhotos and Videosꢀ  
tab,ꢀcopyꢀorꢀsynchronizeꢀthemꢀtoꢀaꢀfolderꢀunderꢀ\My Deviceꢀ(theꢀdeviceꢀmemory)ꢀ  
orꢀ\Storage Cardꢀ(ifꢀaꢀmicroSDꢀcardꢀisꢀinstalled).  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 79  
Music  
TheꢀMusicꢀtabꢀallowsꢀyouꢀtoꢀvisuallyꢀbrowseꢀthroughꢀalbumsꢀandꢀmusicꢀtracksꢀandꢀ  
playꢀmusic.ꢀTheꢀalbumsꢀandꢀmusicꢀtracksꢀthatꢀyouꢀseeꢀonꢀtheꢀMusicꢀtabꢀareꢀfromꢀtheꢀ  
Now PlayingꢀlistꢀofꢀtheꢀLibrary.  
Noteꢀ  
Yourꢀdeviceꢀsearchesꢀforꢀallꢀmusicꢀfilesꢀthatꢀhaveꢀtheꢀfollowingꢀaudioꢀformats:ꢀAMR-  
NB/WBꢀ(.awb),ꢀMP3ꢀ(.mp3),ꢀWMAꢀ(.wma),ꢀAAC/AAC+/eAAC+ꢀ(.aac),ꢀandꢀMPEG-4ꢀ(.m4a).ꢀ  
Itꢀsearchesꢀforꢀmusicꢀfromꢀtheꢀfollowingꢀlocations:ꢀꢀ  
Device:ꢀꢀ\MyꢀMusicꢀ(includingꢀallꢀsubfolders)ꢀ  
ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ\MyꢀDocumentsꢀ(includingꢀallꢀsubfolders)ꢀ  
StorageꢀCard:ꢀ\StorageꢀCardꢀ(includingꢀallꢀsubfolders)  
To play music  
OnꢀtheꢀMusicꢀtab,ꢀflipꢀthroughꢀalbumsꢀandꢀallꢀtheꢀmusicꢀinꢀeachꢀalbum,ꢀthenꢀtouchꢀ  
theꢀPlayꢀiconꢀonꢀtheꢀmiddle-rightꢀsideꢀofꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀstartꢀplayback.  
Swipeꢀupward/  
Touchꢀhereꢀtoꢀgoꢀtoꢀtheꢀ  
downwardꢀonꢀ  
previousꢀalbumꢀorꢀtheꢀ  
theꢀscreenꢀtoꢀflipꢀ  
previousꢀmusicꢀinꢀtheꢀ  
throughꢀalbumsꢀ  
currentꢀalbum.  
andꢀtheꢀmusicꢀorꢀ  
songsꢀinꢀanꢀalbum.  
Touchꢀhereꢀtoꢀplayꢀorꢀpause.  
Touchꢀhereꢀtoꢀgoꢀtoꢀtheꢀnextꢀ  
albumꢀorꢀtheꢀnextꢀmusicꢀinꢀ  
theꢀcurrentꢀalbum.  
Touchꢀtoꢀsetꢀmusicꢀplaybackꢀ  
toꢀRepeat,ꢀturnꢀShuffleꢀonꢀ  
Touchꢀhereꢀtoꢀ  
accessꢀtheꢀLibrary.  
orꢀoff,ꢀandꢀmore.  
80ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
To advance forward or backward in the music  
Touchꢀandꢀholdꢀonꢀtheꢀthinꢀbarꢀbelowꢀtheꢀalbumꢀartꢀtoꢀdisplayꢀtheꢀprogressꢀbar:  
Dragꢀyourꢀfingerꢀrightꢀorꢀleftꢀonꢀtheꢀprogressꢀbarꢀtoꢀmoveꢀforwardꢀorꢀbackwardꢀinꢀ  
theꢀcurrentꢀmusic.  
To set repeat and shuffle modes  
TouchꢀMenu > Repeatꢀandꢀchooseꢀwhetherꢀtoꢀrepeatꢀonce,ꢀrepeatꢀall,ꢀorꢀdoꢀnotꢀ  
repeat.ꢀToꢀtoggleꢀshuffleꢀmodeꢀonꢀandꢀoff,ꢀtouchꢀMenu > Shuffle andꢀthenꢀselectꢀ  
Shuffle OnꢀorꢀShuffle Off.  
Theꢀiconsꢀonꢀtheꢀupper-rightꢀsideꢀofꢀtheꢀMusicꢀtabꢀshowꢀwhetherꢀrepeatꢀandꢀ  
shuffleꢀmodesꢀareꢀenabled.  
Repeatꢀ[One]  
Repeatꢀ[All]  
Shuffleꢀ[On]  
To browse and play music in the Library  
TheꢀLibraryꢀorganizesꢀmusicꢀintoꢀcategories,ꢀsuchꢀasꢀNow Playing,ꢀArtists,ꢀAlbums,ꢀ  
Genres,ꢀAll Songs,ꢀandꢀmore.ꢀWhenꢀyouꢀaddꢀmoreꢀalbumsꢀorꢀmusicꢀtracksꢀtoꢀyourꢀ  
device,ꢀgoꢀtoꢀtheꢀLibraryꢀtoꢀlocateꢀandꢀplayꢀtheꢀnewꢀalbumsꢀorꢀmusicꢀtracks.  
1. OnꢀtheꢀMusicꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀLibraryꢀtoꢀopenꢀtheꢀLibraryꢀscreen.  
2. TheꢀtabsꢀatꢀtheꢀbottomꢀofꢀtheꢀLibraryꢀscreenꢀcorrespondꢀtoꢀtheꢀdifferentꢀ  
categories.ꢀToꢀbrowseꢀmusicꢀunderꢀaꢀcertainꢀcategory,ꢀslideꢀtoꢀtheꢀtabꢀthatꢀ  
correspondsꢀtoꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀcategory.  
3. Tapꢀaꢀmusicꢀtrackꢀtoꢀplayꢀit.  
Noteꢀ  
WhenꢀyouꢀselectꢀaꢀcategoryꢀinꢀtheꢀLibraryꢀsuchꢀasꢀArtistsꢀandꢀplayꢀitsꢀmusic,ꢀtheꢀNowꢀ  
Playingꢀlistꢀwillꢀbeꢀreplacedꢀwithꢀtheꢀmusicꢀtracksꢀfromꢀthatꢀcategory.  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 81  
To use playlists  
Youꢀcanꢀgroupꢀyourꢀfavoriteꢀmusicꢀintoꢀaꢀplaylistꢀandꢀthenꢀplayꢀbackꢀtheꢀplaylist.  
Toꢀcreateꢀaꢀnewꢀplaylist:  
1. SelectꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀmusicꢀonꢀtheꢀMusicꢀtabꢀorꢀtheꢀLibraryꢀtoꢀplayꢀit.  
2. OnꢀtheꢀMusicꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀMenu > Add to Playlist.  
3. Touchꢀ<New Playlist>,ꢀenterꢀaꢀPlaylist nameꢀandꢀthenꢀtouchꢀOK.  
Toꢀaddꢀmoreꢀmusicꢀfilesꢀtoꢀaꢀplaylist:  
1. OnꢀtheꢀPlaylistsꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀaꢀplaylistꢀtoꢀopenꢀit.  
2. TouchꢀMenu > Edit.  
3. TouchꢀMenu > Add.  
4. Selectꢀtheꢀcheckꢀboxesꢀofꢀtheꢀmusicꢀyouꢀwantꢀtoꢀaddꢀtoꢀtheꢀplaylist,ꢀorꢀ  
touchꢀMenu > Select Allꢀtoꢀchooseꢀallꢀtheꢀmusic.  
5. TouchꢀOKꢀthreeꢀtimesꢀandꢀthenꢀtouchꢀUpꢀtoꢀreturnꢀtoꢀtheꢀPlaylistsꢀtab.  
Toꢀplayꢀbackꢀaꢀplaylist:  
1. OnꢀtheꢀPlaylistsꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀaꢀplaylistꢀtoꢀopenꢀit.  
2. Touchꢀtheꢀfirstꢀsongꢀinꢀtheꢀplaylist.ꢀTheꢀMusicꢀtabꢀstartsꢀplayingꢀtheꢀfirstꢀ  
song.ꢀAfterꢀeachꢀsong,ꢀtheꢀnextꢀoneꢀinꢀtheꢀplaylistꢀwillꢀbeꢀplayed.  
Noteꢀ Playlistsꢀareꢀnotꢀautomaticallyꢀupdatedꢀwhenꢀmusicꢀfilesꢀhaveꢀbeenꢀdeletedꢀfromꢀ  
theꢀdeviceꢀmemoryꢀorꢀstorageꢀcard.  
ThereꢀareꢀtwoꢀtypesꢀofꢀplaylistsꢀthatꢀcanꢀbeꢀshownꢀonꢀtheꢀPlaylistsꢀtab:  
Custom playlists.ꢀPlaylistsꢀthatꢀareꢀcreatedꢀonꢀtheꢀMusicꢀtab.  
Windows Media® Player playlists.ꢀPlaylistsꢀthatꢀareꢀinꢀWindowsꢀMedia®ꢀ  
PlayerꢀMobile’sꢀLibraryꢀ(whichꢀisꢀsynchronizedꢀwithꢀWindowsꢀMedia®ꢀPlayerꢀ  
onꢀyourꢀcomputer).ꢀTheyꢀareꢀindicatedꢀbyꢀtheꢀWindowsꢀMedia®ꢀPlayerꢀiconꢀꢀ  
(ꢀ ꢀ).ꢀTheseꢀplaylistsꢀcannotꢀbeꢀedited.  
82ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
WindowsꢀMedia®ꢀ  
Playerꢀplaylists  
Customꢀplaylists  
Noteꢀ  
IfꢀaꢀWindowsꢀMedia®ꢀPlayerꢀplaylistꢀcontainsꢀaꢀcombinationꢀofꢀmusic,ꢀvideoꢀandꢀimageꢀ  
files,ꢀonlyꢀmusicꢀfilesꢀinꢀtheꢀplaylistꢀwillꢀbeꢀsynchronizedꢀtoꢀyourꢀdeviceꢀandꢀotherꢀ  
mediaꢀtypesꢀwillꢀbeꢀfilteredꢀout.  
Weather  
The Weatherꢀtabꢀshowsꢀyouꢀtheꢀcurrentꢀweatherꢀasꢀwellꢀasꢀweatherꢀinformationꢀforꢀ  
theꢀnextꢀfourꢀdaysꢀofꢀtheꢀweek.  
To add a city  
TheꢀWeatherꢀtabꢀcanꢀdisplayꢀweatherꢀinformationꢀofꢀyourꢀlocalꢀcityꢀandꢀotherꢀ  
addedꢀcities.ꢀFollowꢀtheꢀstepsꢀbelowꢀtoꢀaddꢀaꢀcityꢀonꢀthisꢀtab.  
Tipꢀ  
Youꢀcanꢀaddꢀupꢀtoꢀ10ꢀcitiesꢀonꢀtheꢀWeatherꢀtab.  
1. OnꢀtheꢀWeatherꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀMenu > Add Location.  
2. TheꢀSelectꢀCountryꢀscreenꢀthenꢀappears.ꢀFlickꢀyourꢀfingerꢀonꢀtheꢀscreenꢀorꢀuseꢀ  
theꢀQuickꢀScrollꢀbarꢀonꢀtheꢀrightꢀofꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀchooseꢀtheꢀcountry.ꢀ  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 83  
Youꢀcanꢀalsoꢀslowlyꢀscrollꢀthroughꢀtheꢀcountryꢀlistꢀbyꢀdraggingꢀyourꢀfingerꢀ  
upwardꢀonꢀtheꢀscreen.ꢀTouchꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀcountryꢀtoꢀselectꢀit.  
3. TheꢀSelectꢀCityꢀscreenꢀthenꢀappears.ꢀFlickꢀyourꢀfingerꢀonꢀtheꢀscreenꢀorꢀuseꢀ  
theꢀQuickꢀScrollꢀbarꢀonꢀtheꢀrightꢀofꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀchooseꢀtheꢀcity.ꢀYouꢀcanꢀ  
alsoꢀslowlyꢀscrollꢀthroughꢀtheꢀcityꢀlistꢀbyꢀdraggingꢀyourꢀfingerꢀupwardꢀonꢀtheꢀ  
screen.ꢀTouchꢀtheꢀdesiredꢀcityꢀtoꢀselectꢀit.  
To view weather information  
YourꢀdeviceꢀautomaticallyꢀconnectsꢀtoꢀtheꢀInternetꢀviaꢀtheꢀGPRS/3Gꢀdataꢀ  
connectionꢀorꢀWi-Fiꢀtoꢀdownloadꢀandꢀdisplayꢀweatherꢀinformation.ꢀTheꢀcurrentꢀ  
temperature,ꢀtemperatureꢀrange,ꢀtypeꢀofꢀweatherꢀ(sunny,ꢀcloudy,ꢀshowers,ꢀorꢀ  
others),ꢀtimeꢀofꢀdayꢀ(daytimeꢀorꢀnighttime),ꢀandꢀtheꢀweatherꢀinformationꢀforꢀtheꢀ  
nextꢀfourꢀdaysꢀofꢀtheꢀweekꢀareꢀshownꢀonꢀtheꢀWeatherꢀtab.  
Showsꢀtheꢀlastꢀ  
weatherꢀupdate.  
Toꢀswitchꢀbetweenꢀ  
cities,ꢀswipeꢀyourꢀfingerꢀ  
upward/downward,ꢀorꢀ  
touchꢀtheꢀUp/Downꢀ  
arrowꢀonꢀtheꢀscreen.  
Touchꢀtoꢀaddꢀorꢀdeleteꢀ  
aꢀcity,ꢀchangeꢀtheꢀ  
temperatureꢀtoꢀCelsiusꢀ  
orꢀFahrenheit,ꢀandꢀmore.  
Touchꢀthisꢀitemꢀtoꢀ  
downloadꢀtheꢀlatestꢀ  
weatherꢀinformation.  
84ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
To choose download options  
1. OnꢀtheꢀWeatherꢀtab,ꢀtouchꢀMenu > Settings.  
2. Youꢀcanꢀchooseꢀfromꢀtheꢀfollowingꢀoptions:  
Download weather automatically.ꢀWhenꢀthisꢀoptionꢀisꢀselected,ꢀweatherꢀ  
informationꢀisꢀautomaticallyꢀdownloadedꢀfromꢀtheꢀAccuWeatherꢀwebꢀsiteꢀ  
wheneverꢀyouꢀselectꢀtheꢀWeatherꢀtab,ꢀifꢀtheꢀdataꢀhasꢀnotꢀbeenꢀupdatedꢀ  
withinꢀtheꢀlastꢀthreeꢀhours.ꢀWeatherꢀdataꢀisꢀalsoꢀdownloadedꢀeveryꢀtimeꢀ  
anꢀActiveSyncꢀconnectionꢀisꢀestablishedꢀ(throughꢀover-the-airꢀorꢀUSBꢀ  
connections).  
Clearꢀthisꢀoptionꢀifꢀyouꢀpreferꢀtoꢀmanuallyꢀdownloadꢀweatherꢀinformation.  
Download weather when roaming.ꢀSelectꢀthisꢀoptionꢀonlyꢀifꢀyouꢀwantꢀtoꢀ  
allowꢀautomaticꢀdownloadꢀofꢀweatherꢀdataꢀwhenꢀroaming.ꢀThisꢀmayꢀincurꢀ  
additionalꢀcosts.  
Settings  
TheꢀSettingsꢀtabꢀallowsꢀyouꢀtoꢀsynchronizeꢀ  
informationꢀwithꢀyourꢀcomputerꢀorꢀtheꢀExchangeꢀ  
Server,ꢀchangeꢀsoundꢀsettingsꢀsuchꢀasꢀtheꢀringꢀ  
tone,ꢀandꢀchooseꢀaꢀdifferentꢀwallpaperꢀforꢀtheꢀ  
Homeꢀtab.  
Youꢀcanꢀalsoꢀeasilyꢀturnꢀonꢀandꢀoffꢀtheꢀ  
communicationsꢀfeaturesꢀofꢀyourꢀdeviceꢀsuchꢀ  
asꢀWi-Fi,ꢀBluetooth,ꢀandꢀmore,ꢀandꢀrearrangeꢀorꢀ  
removeꢀaꢀTouchFLOꢀ3DꢀHomeꢀscreenꢀtab.  
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 85  
Programs  
TheꢀProgramsꢀtabꢀallowsꢀyouꢀtoꢀaddꢀyourꢀfavoriteꢀprogramsꢀforꢀone-touchꢀaccess.  
Touchꢀaꢀprogramꢀiconꢀtoꢀ  
openꢀtheꢀcorrespondingꢀ  
program.  
Touchꢀanꢀemptyꢀ  
slotꢀtoꢀaddꢀaꢀ  
favoriteꢀprogram.  
Touchꢀtoꢀaccessꢀallꢀ  
theꢀprogramsꢀofꢀyourꢀ  
device.  
Touchꢀtoꢀchooseꢀwhichꢀ  
programꢀtoꢀremoveꢀfromꢀ  
theꢀProgramsꢀtab.  
Whenꢀyouꢀhaveꢀfilledꢀupꢀtheꢀscreenꢀwithꢀprograms,ꢀscrollꢀdownꢀtheꢀProgramsꢀtabꢀ  
toꢀaccessꢀmoreꢀemptyꢀslotsꢀandꢀaddꢀmoreꢀprograms.ꢀToꢀscrollꢀdown,ꢀpressꢀandꢀholdꢀ  
onꢀtheꢀscreenꢀandꢀthenꢀdragꢀyourꢀfingerꢀupward.ꢀYouꢀcanꢀaddꢀupꢀtoꢀ24ꢀfavoriteꢀ  
programs.  
Toꢀscrollꢀbackꢀup,ꢀpressꢀandꢀholdꢀonꢀtheꢀscreenꢀandꢀthenꢀdragꢀyourꢀfingerꢀ  
downward.  
Noteꢀ  
Toꢀreplaceꢀaꢀslotꢀwithꢀanotherꢀprogram,ꢀyouꢀmustꢀdeleteꢀtheꢀoccupyingꢀprogramꢀ  
shortcutꢀfirstꢀandꢀthenꢀaddꢀyourꢀdesiredꢀprogram.  
86ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
3.3 Finger Gestures  
Youꢀcanꢀuseꢀfingerꢀgesturesꢀtoꢀscroll,ꢀzoomꢀandꢀpanꢀonꢀtheꢀtouchꢀscreen.  
Finger scrolling  
Fingerꢀscrollingꢀcanꢀbeꢀusedꢀtoꢀscrollꢀupꢀandꢀdownꢀwebꢀpages,ꢀdocuments,ꢀandꢀlistsꢀ  
suchꢀasꢀtheꢀcontactsꢀlist,ꢀfileꢀlist,ꢀmessageꢀlist,ꢀcalendarꢀappointmentsꢀlist,ꢀandꢀmore.  
Whenꢀfingerꢀ  
scrolling,ꢀswipeꢀorꢀ  
flickꢀyourꢀfingerꢀonꢀ  
theꢀtouchꢀscreen.  
To scroll up and down  
Toꢀscrollꢀdown,ꢀswipeꢀyourꢀfingerꢀupwardꢀonꢀtheꢀtouchꢀscreen.ꢀꢀ  
Toꢀscrollꢀup,ꢀswipeꢀyourꢀfingerꢀdownwardꢀonꢀtheꢀtouchꢀscreen.  
Toꢀauto-scroll,ꢀflickꢀyourꢀfingerꢀupwardꢀorꢀdownwardꢀonꢀtheꢀtouchꢀscreen.ꢀ  
Touchꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀstopꢀscrolling.  
 
TouchFLO™ꢀ3Dꢀ 87  
To scroll left and right  
Toꢀscrollꢀtowardsꢀtheꢀright,ꢀswipeꢀyourꢀfingerꢀtoꢀtheꢀleft.ꢀꢀ  
Toꢀscrollꢀtowardsꢀtheꢀleft,ꢀswipeꢀyourꢀfingerꢀtoꢀtheꢀright.  
Toꢀauto-scroll,ꢀflickꢀyourꢀfingerꢀleftꢀorꢀright.ꢀTouchꢀtheꢀscreenꢀtoꢀstopꢀscrolling.  
Finger zooming  
Theꢀtypeꢀofꢀfingerꢀgestureꢀtoꢀuseꢀwhenꢀzoomingꢀvariesꢀinꢀdifferentꢀprograms.  
ToꢀzoomꢀinꢀonꢀaꢀwebꢀpageꢀinꢀOperaꢀMobile,ꢀtapꢀyourꢀfingerꢀtwiceꢀonꢀtheꢀ  
screen.ꢀSeeꢀ“UsingꢀOperaꢀMobile”ꢀinꢀChapterꢀ8ꢀforꢀdetails.  
ToꢀzoomꢀinꢀonꢀaꢀphotoꢀinꢀAlbum,ꢀmakeꢀaꢀfull-circleꢀswipeꢀonꢀtheꢀtouchꢀscreen.ꢀ  
Seeꢀ“ViewingꢀPhotosꢀandꢀVideosꢀUsingꢀAlbum”ꢀinꢀChapterꢀ11ꢀforꢀdetails.  
Finger panning  
Youꢀcanꢀuseꢀfingerꢀpanningꢀtoꢀmoveꢀtoꢀandꢀviewꢀotherꢀ  
partsꢀofꢀaꢀzoomedꢀphoto,ꢀwebꢀpage,ꢀdocument,ꢀorꢀanꢀ  
e-mail.ꢀToꢀpan,ꢀtouchꢀandꢀholdꢀonꢀtheꢀtouchꢀscreenꢀ  
andꢀthenꢀdragꢀyourꢀfingerꢀinꢀanyꢀdirection.  
Tipꢀ  
Toꢀenableꢀorꢀmuteꢀfingerꢀscrollingꢀandꢀpanningꢀ  
sound,ꢀtouchꢀStart > Settings > Systemꢀtabꢀ>  
TouchFLO,ꢀandꢀthenꢀselectꢀorꢀclearꢀtheꢀEnable  
sound when finger scrolling and panningꢀcheckꢀ  
box.  
88ꢀ TouchFLO™ꢀ3D  
90 Entering Text  
4.1 Entering Information  
When you start a program or select a field that requires text or numbers, the  
Input Panel icon becomes available on the menu bar.  
Tap the Input Selector arrow (that appears next to the Input Panel icon) to open a  
menu where you can select a text input method and customize input options. After  
selecting a text input method, the corresponding Input Panel is displayed, which  
you can use to enter text.  
Tip  
Select Other Input Methods to display more input methods.  
To show or hide the Input Panel, tap the Input Panel icon.  
Key when pressed  
Input Panel  
(Compact QWERTY)  
Input Selector arrow  
Text input methods  
Input Panel icon  
 
Entering Text 91  
Icon  
Input method  
Icon  
Input method  
Letter Recognizer or  
Block Recognizer  
Full QWERTY  
Compact QWERTY  
Keyboard  
Transcriber  
Phone Keypad  
Notes  
Some text input methods may not be available in certain language versions of the  
device.  
When in landscape mode, the Compact QWERTY is not available.  
4.2 Using the Full QWERTY  
The Full QWERTY is a full on-screen QWERTY keyboard layout similar to a desktop  
PC keyboard.  
Tip  
You can also use the Windows Mobile on-screen keyboard which also has a QWERTY  
keyboard layout by selecting Keyboard (or Other Input Methods > Keyboard) on  
the Text input method menu.  
 
9ꢀ Entering Text  
• Tap to enter letters  
or symbols.  
• Tap and hold  
to enter a  
punctuation mark,  
symbol, or number  
that appears on  
top of a key.  
Displays the word  
candidate list in T9  
mode. Tap a word to  
insert it into your text.  
Tap  
to add a word  
to the T9 dictionary.  
Tap to delete the  
previous character.  
Tap to create  
• Tap to enter an  
uppercase letter.  
• Tap twice to turn  
on Caps Lock.  
a new line.  
Tap to toggle between  
using Normal or T9 mode.  
Tap to open a keyboard layout  
that lets you easily enter numbers  
and symbols. See “Using Numeric  
and Symbol Modefor details.  
To enter text using the Full QWERTY  
1. Start a program that accepts text input, such as Word Mobile.  
2. Tap the Input Selector arrow, then tap Full QWERTY.  
3. Start tapping keys on the keyboard as you would on a PC keyboard to enter  
your text. To learn how to enter text using T9 mode, see “Using Multitap and  
T9 Modesin this chapter.  
Entering Text 9ꢁ  
4.3 Using the Compact QWERTY  
The Compact QWERTY is a type of on-screen keyboard which features ꢀ0 keys.  
With its large, touch-friendly keys and enhanced features such as T9 predictive  
input, you can enter text faster and more accurately.  
• Tap to enter letters  
or symbols.  
Displays the word  
• Tap and hold  
candidate list in T9  
to enter a  
mode. Tap a word to  
punctuation mark,  
insert it into your text.  
symbol, or number  
Tap  
to add a word  
that appears on  
top of a key.  
to the T9 dictionary.  
Tap to delete the  
previous character.  
Tap to create  
• Tap to enter an  
uppercase letter.  
• Tap twice to turn  
on Caps Lock.  
a new line.  
Tap to toggle between using  
Multitap or T9 mode.  
Tap to open a keyboard layout  
that lets you easily enter numbers  
and symbols. See “Using Numeric  
and Symbol Modefor details.  
Tip  
You can tap and hold  
to immediately open the numeric keyboard.  
To enter text using the Compact QWERTY  
1. Start a program that accepts text input, such as Word Mobile.  
2. Tap the Input Selector arrow, then tap Compact QWERTY.  
3. Start tapping keys on the keyboard to enter your text. To learn how to enter text  
using Multitap or T9 mode, seeUsing Multitap and T9 Modesin this chapter.  
 
94 Entering Text  
4.4 Using the Phone Keypad  
The Phone Keypad is a 1ꢀ-key on-screen keypad that has a layout similar to mobile  
phone keypads, plus some additional keys. The Phone Keypad has large keys and  
enhanced input features such as T9 predictive input, which makes it faster for you  
to enter text in your messages and documents.  
• Tap to enter letters  
or symbols.  
• Tap and hold  
to enter a  
punctuation mark,  
symbol, or number  
that appears on  
top of a key  
Displays the word candidate list  
in T9 mode. Tap a word to insert it  
into your text. Tap  
to add a word  
to the T9 dictionary.  
Tap to open the input settings.  
• Tap to enter an  
uppercase letter.  
• Tap twice to turn  
on Caps Lock.  
Tap to delete the previous character.  
Tap to create a new line.  
Tap to open a keyboard layout that lets  
you easily enter numbers and symbols.  
See “Using Numeric and Symbol Mode”  
for details.  
Tap to toggle between using Multitap  
or T9 mode.  
Tip  
You can tap and hold  
to immediately open the numeric keyboard.  
To enter text using the Phone Keypad  
1. Start a program that accepts text input, such as Word Mobile.  
2. Tap the Input Selector arrow, then tap Phone Keypad.  
3. Start tapping keys on the keyboard to enter your text. To learn how to enter  
text using Multitap or T9 mode, see “Using Multitap and T9 Modesin this  
chapter.  
 
Entering Text 95  
4.5 Using Multitap and T9 Modes  
When using the on-screen keyboards, you can choose to enter text using Multitap  
or T9 mode.  
Multitap mode  
In Multitap mode (for Compact QWERTY), enter a character by tapping a key until  
the desired character is displayed on the screen.  
To enter the first letter that shows on a key, tap the key once. To enter the  
second letter, tap twice.  
To enter a punctuation mark, symbol, or number that appears on top of a key,  
tap and hold the key.  
T9 mode  
T9 is a predictive text input mode which displays a word candidate list as you enter  
the first few characters so you just select the word that you want.  
To enter text using T9 mode  
1. Start entering the first few letters of a word. As you enter each letter,  
predicted words will appear above the keyboard.  
2. Tap the desired word to immediately insert it to your text.  
Note Navigate through the word candidate list if there are more words to choose from.  
To add a word to the T9 dictionary  
If the word that you have entered is not found in the dictionary, you can add it to  
the dictionary.  
1. While in T9 mode, type a letter and then tap  
on right side of the word  
candidate list.  
 
9ꢂ Entering Text  
2. Type the word you want to add and then tap  
.
Tap to cancel  
word addition.  
To customize Touch Input settings  
1. Tap the Input Selector arrow, then tap Touch Input Settings.  
2. On the Touch Input Settings screen, select or clear the following options  
according to your preferences:  
Spell Correction. Lets you correct typographical errors by selecting from  
a list of possible words that reflect the characters of the keys you have  
tapped as well as characters of nearby keys.  
Word Completion in T9 mode. Lets you select from a list of possible  
words based on the keys that you have tapped and on the words available  
in the dictionary.  
Word Completion in ABC mode. Lets you select from a list of possible  
combinations based on the characters that appear on the keys that you  
tapped.  
Auto-Substitution. Automatically inserts an apostrophe when you type  
common contracted words (for example, “dontautomatically becomes  
“don’t”).  
3. Tap Done.  
Entering Text 9ꢃ  
4.6 Using Numeric and Symbol Mode  
Switch to Numeric and Symbol mode to let you easily enter numbers and common  
symbols such as parentheses, braces, currency signs, punctuation marks, special  
characters, and more. Numeric and Symbol mode is available when using the Full  
QWERTY or Compact QWERTY.  
Tap a number or symbol  
to insert it into your text.  
Tap to go to the previous  
or next page of symbols.  
See “To lock the keyboard in  
Numeric and Symbol mode.”  
Tap to switch to the  
numeric keyboard  
Compact QWERTY  
Full QWERTY  
Tap to switch back to the  
letter keyboard layout.  
To switch to Numeric and Symbol mode  
1. While using Full QWERTY or Compact QWERTY, tap  
/
.
2. Locate the number or symbol, then tap it to insert it into your text.  
 
98 Entering Text  
To lock the keyboard in Numeric and Symbol mode  
You can lock the keyboard in Numeric and Symbol mode so you can continuously  
enter symbols and numbers.  
1. Tap the Input Selector arrow and then tap Other Input Methods > Options.  
2. In the Input Method tab, select a Touch input method in the Input method  
list, then tap Options.  
3. Clear the Turn on one-touch symbol entry check box.  
Tip  
In Compact QWERTY, tap  
Numeric and Symbol mode and switching back to the letter keyboard layout after  
tapping a symbol or number.  
/
to toggle between locking the keyboard in  
4.7 Using Block Recognizer  
With Block Recognizer, you use a single stroke to write letters, numbers, symbols,  
and punctuation, which are then converted into typed text.  
To use Block Recognizer  
1. From a program, tap the Input Selector arrow and then tap Other Input  
Methods > Block Recognizer.  
2. Write characters, numbers, and symbols in the designated writing area.  
Enter letters by writing in the abc (left) area of the box.  
Enter numbers by writing in the 123 (right) area of the box.  
Enter symbols and punctuation by tapping the left or right area of the box  
(a gray dot appears), then writing the desired character.  
Tip  
For help with writing characters, tap the question mark near the writing area.  
 
Entering Text 99  
4.8 Using Letter Recognizer  
With Letter Recognizer, you can write individual letters, numbers, and punctuation  
marks, which are then converted into typed text.  
To use Letter Recognizer  
1. From a program, tap the Input Selector arrow and then tap Other Input  
Methods > Letter Recognizer.  
2. Write characters, numbers, and symbols in the designated writing area.  
Enter uppercase letters by writing in the ABC (left) area of the box.  
Enter lowercase letters by writing in the abc (middle) area of the box.  
Enter numbers by writing in the 123 (right) area of the box.  
Enter punctuation and symbols by writing the desired character in the  
123 (right) area of the box.  
Tip  
For help with writing characters, tap the question mark near the writing area.  
4.9 Using Transcriber  
Transcriber is a handwriting recognition program that enables you to write in  
cursive, print, or a combination of both.  
To write using Transcriber  
1. Open a program that accepts user input, such as Word Mobile.  
2. Tap the Input Selector arrow and then tap Other Input Methods >  
Transcriber. The Transcriber introductory screen appears. Read the  
introduction and tap OK.  
3. Position the cursor where you want text to appear.  
4. Use the stylus to write anywhere on the screen. The handwriting will be  
converted to text shortly after you lift the stylus from the screen.  
 
100 Entering Text  
To enter punctuation and symbols  
Transcriber comes with an on-screen keyboard that provides an easy way to add  
punctuation or a special symbol to existing text. To use this on-screen keyboard, tap  
on the Transcriber toolbar.  
The keyboard remains visible until you tap the button again.  
Tips  
To reposition the keyboard, tap and hold the title bar, then drag to the desired  
location.  
When no text is selected, you can open the keyboard by using the gesture (draw  
a line straight down and then straight up). For more information about using  
Transcriber gestures, see Help on your device.  
To edit text  
1. In a program, draw a line from left to right across the text you want to edit.  
2. After you lift the stylus from the screen, the line disappears and the selected  
text will be highlighted.  
3. Do either of the following:  
Rewrite the text.  
Use gestures to capitalize letters, insert a space, and so on. For information  
about using Transcriber gestures, see Help on your device.  
10ꢀ Synchronizing Information With Your Computer  
5.1 About Synchronization  
You can take information from your computer wherever you go by synchronizing  
them to your device. The following types of information can be synchronized  
between your computer and your device:  
Microsoft® Office Outlook® information, which include Office Outlook e-  
mail, contacts, calendar, tasks, and notes  
Notes, which are created using Microsoft® Office OneNote® 2007  
Media, such as pictures, music, and video  
Favorites, which are the bookmarked links to your favorite web sites  
Files, such as documents and other files  
Before you can synchronize, you need to install and set up first the synchronization  
software on your computer. For more information, see “Setting Up Windows Mobile  
Device Center on Windows Vista®and “Setting Up ActiveSync® on Windows® XPin  
this chapter.  
Note  
ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center only synchronises data on your  
computer and device. If you have installed a storage card and you want to back up  
files from the storage card, use Windows Explorer on your computer to copy files from  
the storage card to your computer.  
Ways to synchronize  
After you have installed the synchronization software on your computer, connect  
and synchronize your device with your computer by:  
Using the supplied USB sync cable.  
Upon connecting the sync cable to your device and your computer, the  
synchronization process automatically starts.  
Using Bluetooth.  
You must first set up a Bluetooth partnership between your device and your  
computer before you can synchronize information between them using  
 
Synchronizing Information With Your Computer 10ꢁ  
Bluetooth. For more information about setting up a Bluetooth partnership,  
see Chapter 9. For information about synchronizing through Bluetooth, see  
“Synchronizing via Bluetoothlater in this chapter.  
Try to synchronize regularly in order to keep information up-to-date in both your  
device and your computer.  
Notes  
You can also synchronize Outlook e-mail, contacts, calendar, and tasks on your  
device with the Exchange Server at your work. For more information about setting  
up your device to synchronize with the Exchange Server, see Chapter ꢃ.  
If you are sending your device for repair or performing a hard reset, data from your  
device will be lost. It is recommended that you sync your device to your computer  
to back up your files. To back up files from the storage card to your computer, use  
Windows Explorer to copy files from the storage card to the computer.  
5.2 Setting Up Windows Mobile® Device Center on  
Windows Vista®  
Microsoft Windows Mobile® Device Center is the replacement for Microsoft®  
ActiveSync® on Windows Vista®.  
Note  
Some versions of Windows Vista® come with Windows Mobile Device Center already  
installed. If Windows Mobile Device Center is not available on your Windows Vista®,  
you can install it from the Getting Started Disc that came with your device.  
Set up synchronization in Windows Mobile Device Center  
When you connect your device to your computer and start Windows Mobile Device  
Center for the first time, you are asked to create a Windows Mobile partnership with  
your device. To create a partnership:  
1. Connect your device to your computer. Windows Mobile Device Center  
configures itself, then opens.  
2. On the license agreement screen, click Accept.  
 
104 Synchronizing Information With Your Computer  
3. On the Windows Mobile Device Center’s Home screen, click Set up your  
device.  
Note Choose Connect without setting up your device if you only want to transfer  
media files, check for updates, and explore your device but not synchronize  
Outlook information.  
4. Select the items you want to synchronize, then click Next.  
5. Enter a device name, then click Set Up.  
When you finish the setup wizard, Windows Mobile Device Center synchronizes  
your device automatically. Notice that Outlook e-mails and other information  
appear on your device after synchronization.  
Synchronizing Information With Your Computer 105  
Use Windows Mobile Device Center  
To open Windows Mobile Device Center, click Start > All Programs > Windows  
Mobile Device Center on your Windows Vista computer.  
On Windows Mobile Device Center, you can do the following:  
Click Mobile Device Settings to change synchronization settings.  
When you click Pictures, Music and Video > XX new pictures/video clips  
are available for import, a wizard guides you to tag and transfer photos  
from your device to the Photo Gallery on your computer.  
Click Pictures, Music and Video > Add media to your device from  
Windows Media Player to synchronize music and video files using Windows  
Media® Player. For more information, see “Using Windows Media® Player  
Mobilein Chapter 11.  
Click File Management > Browse the contents of your device to view  
documents and files on your device.  
Note  
See Windows Mobile Device Center Help for more information.  
 
10ꢂ Synchronizing Information With Your Computer  
5.3 Setting Up ActiveSync® on Windows® XP  
The Getting Started disc that comes with your device contains Microsoft ActiveSync  
4.5 or later. Follow the steps in this section to install and set up ActiveSync on  
Windows XP or other compatible Windows systems.  
Note  
For a list of compatible Windows systems, go to  
Install ActiveSync  
1. Place the Getting Started disc to the disc drive of your computer.  
2. Click Setup and Installation.  
3. Select the ActiveSync check box, then click Install.  
4. Read the license terms, then click Accept.  
5. When installation is completed, click Done.  
6. On the Getting Started with Windows Mobile screen, click Close.  
Set up synchronization in ActiveSync  
1. Connect your device to your computer. The Synchronization Setup Wizard  
automatically starts and guides you to create a synchronization partnership.  
Click Next to proceed.  
2. To synchronize your device with your computer, clear the Synchronize  
directly with a server running Microsoft Exchange check box, then click  
Next.  
3. Select the information types that you want to synchronize, then click Next.  
4. Select or clear the Allow wireless data connections check box according to  
your preference.  
5. Click Finish.  
 
Synchronizing Information With Your Computer 10ꢃ  
When you finish the wizard, ActiveSync synchronizes your device automatically.  
Notice that Outlook e-mails and other information appear on your device after  
synchronization.  
5.4 Synchronizing With Your Computer  
Connect and synchronize your device with your computer using the USB cable or  
Bluetooth connection.  
Start and stop synchronization  
You can manually synchronize either from your device or computer.  
From your device  
On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then touch  
Sync Data; or  
Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync, then tap Sync. To end synchronization  
before it completes, tap Stop.  
Tip  
To delete a partnership with one computer completely, disconnect your device  
from that computer first. In ActiveSync on your device, tap Menu > Options, tap the  
computer name, then tap Delete.  
From Windows Mobile Device Center  
1. Click Start > All Programs > Windows Mobile Device Center.  
2. Click  
To end synchronization before it completes, click  
From ActiveSync on your computer  
at the lower left of the Windows Mobile Device Center.  
.
When you connect your device to your computer, ActiveSync automatically opens  
on your computer and synchronizes.  
To manually start synchronization, click  
.
To end synchronization before it completes, click  
.
 
108 Synchronizing Information With Your Computer  
Change which information is synchronized  
You can change the information types and the amount of information to  
synchronize for each type either on your device or your computer. Follow the steps  
below to change synchronization settings on your device.  
Note  
Before changing synchronization settings on your device, disconnect it from your  
computer.  
1. In ActiveSync on your device, tap Menu > Options.  
2. Select the check box for any items you want to synchronize. If you cannot  
select a check box, you might have to clear the check box for the same  
information type elsewhere in the list.  
3. To change synchronization settings for an information type, for instance,  
E-mail, select it and tap Settings.  
You can then set the download size limit, specify the time period of  
information to download, and more.  
Notes  
Some information types such as Favorites, Files and Media cannot be selected in  
ActiveSync Options on your device. You can only select or clear these items from  
your computer’s Windows Mobile Device Center or ActiveSync.  
A computer can have sync partnerships with many different Windows Mobile  
powered devices, but a device can have sync partnerships with at most two  
computers. To ensure that your device will synchronize properly with both  
computers, set up the second computer using the same synchronization settings  
you used on the first computer.  
Outlook e-mail can be synchronized with only one computer.  
Synchronizing Information With Your Computer 109  
Troubleshoot sync connection problem  
In some cases, when the computer connects to the Internet or a local network, it  
may disconnect the connection with your device in favor of the Internet or network  
connection.  
If this happens, tap Start > Settings > Connections tab > USB to PC, then clear the  
Enable faster data synchronization check box. This makes your computer utilize a  
serial USB connection with your device.  
5.5 Synchronizing via Bluetooth  
You can connect and synchronize your device with the computer using Bluetooth.  
Note  
To connect and synchronize your device with a computer via Bluetooth, your  
computer must have a built-in Bluetooth or installed with a Bluetooth adapter or  
dongle.  
To synchronize with a computer via Bluetooth  
1. Set up Windows Mobile Device Center or ActiveSync on your computer to  
synchronize through Bluetooth. See the program’s Help for instructions.  
2. If this is the first time you have connected to this computer via Bluetooth,  
you must first complete the Bluetooth wizard on your device and set  
up a Bluetooth partnership between your device and the computer. For  
more information about creating a Bluetooth partnership, see “Bluetooth  
Partnershipsin Chapter 9.  
3. On your device, tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync.  
4. Tap Menu > Connect via Bluetooth. Make sure the Bluetooth function of  
both your device and the computer are turned on and set to visible mode.  
Note  
To conserve battery power, turn off Bluetooth when not in use.  
 
110 Synchronizing Information With Your Computer  
5.6 Synchronizing Music and Video  
If you want to carry your music or other digital media along with you while you  
travel, set up Windows Media® Player on your computer to synchronize music and  
video with your device.  
Other than selecting the Media information type to be synchronized, all media  
synchronization settings must be set in Windows Media® Player. Before media can  
be synchronized, you must do the following:  
Install Windows Media® Player Version 11 on your computer. (Windows  
Media® Player 11 works only in Windows XP or later versions).  
Connect your device to the computer with a USB cable. If your device is  
currently connected using Bluetooth, you must end that connection before  
media can be synchronized.  
Set up a sync partnership between your device and your computer’s Windows  
Media® Player.  
For more information about using Windows Media® Player Mobile, see Chapter 11.  
 
11ꢀ Exchanging Messages  
6.1 Messaging  
Messaging is a central location where you will find all types of messaging accounts,  
which include text messages (SMS) and e-mail accounts.  
To select a messaging account  
Do one of the following:  
On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, slide to the  
Mail tab and then touch Menu > Accounts >  
Accounts. The Account Picker screen then opens  
where you can select an account.  
Tip  
You can also tap Start > Messaging to access  
the Account Picker screen.  
While you are in a message list of a certain  
account, for example Text Messages, tap  
Menu > Go To to switch to other types of  
messaging accounts.  
To configure message account settings  
Tap Menu > Options on the Account Picker  
screen; or  
Tap Menu > Tools > Options while you’re in a  
message list.  
Account Picker screen  
To automatically add a signature in outgoing messages  
You can automatically add your name and other information as your signature in  
outgoing SMS and e-mail messages:  
Note  
You need to specify your signature for each type of messaging account.  
1. Tap Start > Messaging, then tap Menu > Options.  
2. Tap Signatures.  
 
Exchanging Messages 11ꢁ  
3. Select a messaging account in which to add a signature.  
4. Select the Use signature with this account check box.  
5. In the provided text box, enter the information that will be displayed as your  
signature.  
6. If you want the signature to be added whenever you reply or forward  
messages, select the Use when replying and forwarding check box, then  
tap OK.  
7. Repeat the steps to add a signature to other messaging accounts.  
6.2 Text Messages  
Send short text messages (SMS) to other mobile phones. SMS messages have a  
1ꢂ0-character limit. If you continue to enter text after the limit is reached, the text  
message will be delivered to your recipients in two or more separate messages.  
These are called concatenated SMS messages. If your recipient’s phone supports  
concatenated messages, they will receive your complete SMS message at one time.  
Create a new text message  
Depending on your preference, there are a number of alternative ways you can  
create a new text message.  
From the TouchFLO 3D Home screen  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Messages tab.  
2. Touch the New Message icon (  
) on the upper right side of the screen.  
Tip  
To send a text message to a favorite contact, first select the photo of the desired  
contact in the People tab to open his or her contact card and then touch Send text  
message. For more information about working with favorite contacts, see “Peoplein  
Chapter ꢁ.  
 
114 Exchanging Messages  
From the Account Picker screen  
1. Tap Start > Messaging > SMS \ MMS.  
2. Tap Menu > New.  
From the Contacts screen  
1. Tap Start > Contacts.  
2. Tap the contact’s name to open his or her contact card.  
3. Touch Send text message.  
Compose and send a text message  
After creating a new text message, follow the steps below to enter your message  
and then send it.  
1. To add recipients, enter their mobile phone numbers in the To field, separating  
them with a semicolon. You can also tap To or tap Menu > Add Recipient to  
add mobile phone numbers from Contacts.  
2. Enter your message.  
Tip  
To choose from preset messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap a desired  
message. To check the spelling, tap Menu > Spell Check.  
3. Tap Send.  
Tips  
For more information about entering text and symbols, see Chapter 4.  
If you want to know when a text message is received, before sending the message  
that you are composing, tap Menu > Message Options, then select the Request  
message delivery notification check box.  
To always receive a delivery notification, tap Menu > Tools > Options in the text  
message list, tap Text Messages, then select the Request delivery notifications  
check box.  
Exchanging Messages 115  
Manage text messages  
Text messages that are sent to and received from a contact (or number) are  
grouped as a single thread in your inbox. Threaded SMS lets you see exchanged  
messages (similar to a chat program) with a contact on the screen.  
To reply to a text message  
1. In the SMS \ MMS inbox, tap a message thread to open it.  
2. At the bottom of the screen, type your reply message and then tap Send.  
Enter your reply  
message here  
11ꢂ Exchanging Messages  
To copy a message in the thread to the SIM card  
1. In the SMS \ MMS inbox, tap the message to open it.  
2. Select a message in the thread that you want to copy to the SIM card.  
Note You cannot copy a sent message from the thread to the SIM card.  
3. Tap Menu > Copy to SIM.  
To copy a text message from the SIM card to the device  
1. In the SMS \ MMS inbox, select the SIM message you want to copy.  
2. Tap Menu > Copy to Phone.  
Note  
Copying SIM text messages to your device results in duplicate messages in the Inbox  
folder when your SIM card is in use.  
To delete a message in the thread  
1. In the SMS \ MMS inbox, tap a message thread to open it.  
2. Select a message in the thread that you want to delete.  
3. Tap Menu > Delete.  
To delete all messages in a thread  
1. In the SMS \ MMS inbox, select a message thread.  
2. Tap Delete.  
6.3 MMS  
Sending multimedia messages (MMS) to your friends and family is fun and easy. You  
can include pictures, videos, and audio clips in a multimedia message.  
Notes  
Multimedia messaging is a charged service and has to be provisioned on your  
mobile phone account. Contact your wireless service provider to have MMS  
provisioned as part of your calling plan.  
Make sure the size of MMS messages that you send is within the limits allowed by  
your wireless service provider.  
 
Exchanging Messages 11ꢃ  
Change the MMS settings  
Check your device to see if it is preconfigured with your wireless service provider’s  
MMS settings. Add the MMS settings of your wireless service provider if there are no  
preset MMS settings found on your device.  
To configure MMS message settings  
1. Tap Start > Messaging > SMS \ MMS.  
2. Tap Menu > MMS Options. The Settings screen then appears.  
3. In the Preferences tab, choose from the available options according to your  
needs.  
4. Tap the Servers tab and check if your device is preset with MMS server  
settings.  
If there are no preset settings,  
tap New and enter the following  
information, which you obtained  
from your wireless service  
provider:  
Gateway. Location of the  
MMS server, which is usually  
in the form of an IP address.  
Port number. HTTP port  
number used for connecting  
to the MMS server and for file  
transfer.  
Server address. URL address  
of the server where MMS  
messages are stored.  
118 Exchanging Messages  
Connect via. Select the connection that your device uses for MMS  
messages.  
Send limit. Select the maximum MMS message size allowed by your  
wireless service provider.  
WAP version. Select either WAP 1.2 or WAP 2.0, depending on which  
one is being used by your wireless service provider.  
5. Tap Done.  
Notes  
If your device already has preset MMS settings, it is recommended that you do not  
change these settings. If you change the preset settings, your device may not be  
able to send and receive MMS messages.  
If you add several MMS message service providers to the Settings screen, you can  
choose one as your default provider. Select the provider's name in the list, then tap  
Set As Default.  
Create and send MMS messages  
You can compose MMS messages in a combination of slides, where each slide can  
consist of a photo, video or audio clip, and/or text.  
To compose an MMS message  
1. Tap Start > Messaging > SMS \ MMS, then tap Menu > New > MMS.  
2. When you see the Choose a MMS screen, tap a preset template, or tap  
Custom to open a blank MMS message.  
Note If you prefer to start composing from a blank MMS message every time, select  
the Always choose custom check box.  
3. In To, enter the recipient’s phone number or e-mail address directly, or tap To,  
Cc, or Bcc to choose a phone number or an e-mail address from Contacts.  
Note You may need to scroll up to see Cc and Bcc.  
4. Enter a subject for your message.  
Exchanging Messages 119  
)to select and insert a photo or video clip. When  
5. Tap the Insert icon (  
selecting a photo or video clip, you can:  
Tap Select to insert the selected photo or video clip into the MMS  
message you are composing.  
Tap  
Tap  
to take a photo and insert it into the MMS message.  
to record MMS video and insert it into the MMS message.  
) to quit selection and return to the MMS message.  
Tap Exit (  
6. Enter text and insert audio clips by tapping the respective areas. See “To add  
text to an MMS messageand “To add an audio clip to an MMS messagefor  
details.  
7. To add more slides, tap or tap Menu > Slides > Insert Slide. Repeat steps  
5 and ꢂ to insert photos/videos, text, and audio onto your slides.  
8. Tap Send to send the MMS message.  
Tip  
You can also send an MMS message from Pictures & Videos, Album, or the Camera  
program.  
1ꢀ0 Exchanging Messages  
To add text to an MMS message  
When you tap Insert text here on your MMS message, an empty screen appears  
where you can enter your text. You can insert the following types of information:  
Enter your own text  
Insert contact  
Choose from common words  
information  
or phrases from the My Text list  
Insert calendar  
appointment  
Include a Favorites link  
Add an emoticon  
Tip  
To edit or delete a phrase on the My Text list, tap and hold a string, then tap Edit or  
Delete from the shortcut menu. To add a new phrase, tap New.  
To add an audio clip to an MMS message  
You can add one audio clip per slide in your MMS message.  
1. Tap Insert audio on your MMS message.  
By default, My Documents will be shown. Tap My Music or another folder that  
contains audio files. When navigating folders, tap the down arrow ( ) to  
return to the upper folder.  
2. Select an audio file. When selected, you can:  
Tap  
to play the audio clip,  
to pause, or  
to stop playback.  
Tap Select to insert it into your MMS message.  
Exchanging Messages 1ꢀ1  
) to quit selection and return to your MMS message.  
Tap Exit (  
Note  
To record a new audio clip and add it to your MMS message, tap  
. The Record pop-  
up window then opens. Tap Record to start recording, and Stop to end the recording.  
Tap Play to listen to the recorded audio clip, then tap Add. The new audio clip is then  
inserted into your MMS message.  
View and reply to MMS messages  
To view an MMS message  
Use the playback controls  
,
, and  
.
Tap Contents to see a list of files included in the message. On the Message  
Contents screen, you can do the following:  
To save a file, select it, and tap Menu > Save.  
To save the contents of a text file to the My Text list, tap  
Menu > Save into My Text.  
To associate a photo to one of your contacts, tap  
Menu > Assign to Contact.  
To reply to an MMS message  
1. In the SMS \ MMS inbox, select the mobile phone number or name of the  
contact who sent you the MMS message.  
2. In the threaded message, MMS messages will have the  
icon. Tap this icon  
to open and view an MMS message.  
3. After viewing the MMS message, tap Menu > Reply > via MMS to reply  
with an MMS message or tap Menu > Reply > via SMS to reply with a text  
message.  
1ꢀꢀ Exchanging Messages  
To block a phone number from sending you MMS messages  
If you do not want to receive MMS messages from a particular sender, you can add  
the sender’s phone number to the MMS Blacklist.  
1. When you receive a new MMS message, open and view the message.  
2. To avoid receiving MMS messages from this sender next time, tap Menu >  
Show > Message Detail.  
3. On the Message Detail screen, tap Menu > Show Contact Details.  
4. Tap Menu > Save to Blacklist.  
5. Tap Done.  
Tip  
To unblock a phone number and allow the sender to send you MMS messages,  
remove the number from the Blacklist. Go to the SMS \ MMS inbox, tap Menu > MMS  
Options > Blacklist tab, tap and hold the phone number in the Blacklist, and then  
tap Delete.  
6.4 Types of E-mail Accounts  
You can set up the following types of e-mail accounts on your device:  
Outlook e-mail that you sync with your computer or the Exchange Server.  
E-mail account that you have from an Internet Service Provider (ISP) or other  
e-mail provider.  
Web-based e-mail accounts such as Gmail®, Yahoo!® Mail Plus, AOL®, and  
others.  
Work account that you access using a VPN connection.  
 
Exchanging Messages 1ꢀꢁ  
Set up your device to synchronize Outlook e-mail with the  
computer  
If you have installed the synchronization software on your computer and created a  
partnership with your device, then your device is ready to send and receive Outlook  
e-mail.  
If you have not yet installed the synchronization software nor created a partnership,  
do so by following the procedures in Chapter 5.  
Tip  
To set up your company e-mail account so that you can access Outlook e-mail  
messages wirelessly, you must set up your device to synchronize via an over-the-  
air connection with your company’s Exchange Server. For more information about  
synchronizing with your company e-mail server, see Chapter ꢃ.  
Add an e-mail account  
To add a new e-mail account, you can do one of the following:  
On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, slide to the Mail tab and then touch  
Menu > Accounts > New Account; or  
Tap Start > Messaging > Setup E-mail.  
The E-mail Setup wizard then opens and lets you enter your e-mail account  
settings. See “E-mail Setup Wizardin this chapter for details.  
1ꢀ4 Exchanging Messages  
6.5 E-mail Setup Wizard  
Windows Mobile’s E-mail Setup wizard walks you through the process of setting  
up your e-mail account. It has an Auto Setup feature which can automatically set  
up your e-mail account based on the e-mail address and password that you enter,  
if your e-mail provider settings are preconfigured on your device. If the settings  
are not found on your device, Auto Setup then attempts to retrieve the settings  
online for which you may be charged when your device connects to the Internet  
and downloads them. If it cannot find the e-mail settings online, you need to enter  
them manually.  
Note  
For more information about setting up your company Outlook e-mail account, see  
Chapter ꢃ.  
Set up an Internet e-mail account  
Set up a POPꢁ or IMAP4 e-mail account on your device if you have an e-mail  
account from an Internet service provider (ISP) or other e-mail service provider, or a  
web-based account such as Gmail, Yahoo! Mail Plus, or AOL. You can also add a work  
account that you access using a VPN server connection as a POPꢁ/IMAP4 account.  
1. Add a new e-mail account. See “Add an e-mail accountfor instructions.  
2. Enter your E-mail address and the Password for your e-mail account and  
select the Save password option. Tap Next.  
3. If e-mail provider settings are found preconfigured on your device, the E-mail  
Setup wizard shows a successful message. Tap Next.  
If the settings are not found on your device, select the Try to get e-mail  
settings automatically from the Internet checkbox to find and download  
e-mail server settings from the Internet and then tap Next.  
4. Enter Your name and the Account display name and then tap Next.  
 
Exchanging Messages 1ꢀ5  
Note If the E-mail Setup wizard was unsuccessful in finding and downloading settings  
from the Internet, select Internet e-mail from the Your e-mail provider list on  
the next screen. You will be asked to enter e-mail server settings. See “To specify  
e-mail server settingsfor details.  
5. In the Automatic Send/Receive list, choose how frequent you want e-mail  
messages to be automatically sent and downloaded on your device.  
Note Tap Review all download settings to select download options, set the e-mail  
format as HTML or plain text, and more. For more information, see “To customize  
download and format settings."  
6. Tap Finish.  
To specify e-mail server settings  
If Auto Setup is unsuccessful, contact your ISP or e-mail provider for the Incoming  
mail server and Outgoing mail server settings so you can enter them on your  
device.  
Other options that you can select include the following:  
Select the Outgoing server requires authentication check box, if required  
by your provider.  
If the outgoing e-mail server requires a different user name and password  
for sending e-mail, clear the Use the same user name and password for  
sending e-mail check box. You will be prompted to enter this information.  
Tap Advanced Server Settings, then select the Require SSL check boxes if  
your e-mail provider uses an SSL connection for more secured e-mail. From  
the Network connection list, select the data connection that you use for  
connecting to the Internet.  
To customize download and format settings  
Before you tap Finish when setting up your POPꢁ or IMAP4 e-mail account, you can  
tap the Review all download settings link at the bottom of the screen to choose  
download options, message format, and other settings.  
1ꢀꢂ Exchanging Messages  
Options  
Description  
Automatic Send/Receive  
You can select a time interval for connecting to the Internet  
automatically to send and receive messages.  
Download messages  
Set the number of days of messages that you want to be  
downloaded to your device.  
Send/receive when I  
click Send  
By default, messages are immediately delivered when you  
tap Send. If you prefer to save outgoing messages to the  
Outbox folder first, clear the check box. (In this case, you will  
need to manually send messages by tapping  
Menu > Send/Receive).  
Use automatic send/  
receive schedule when  
roaming  
This allows your device to data roam when there is a set time  
interval for connecting to the Internet automatically. Since  
this may result in higher connection costs, you may want to  
leave the check box cleared.  
When deleting  
messages  
Choose whether to delete messages from the mail server  
when you delete them on your device.  
Message format  
Select HTML or Plain Text.  
Message download limit  
Select the e-mail download size. If you have large volumes of  
e-mail, use a lower size or select to download headers only.  
Set up a custom domain e-mail  
When you are using an e-mail domain name that is hosted by a different e-mail  
provider (for example, your e-mail address may be Benjamin@startup.com but  
Email.com hosts the e-mail account and provides e-mail services), select the  
Custom Domain option in the E-mail Setup wizard to set up your e-mail account  
on your device.  
1. Add a new e-mail account. See “Add an e-mail accountfor instructions.  
2. Enter your E-mail address and the Password for your e-mail account and  
select the Save password option. Tap Next.  
3. Clear the Try to get e-mail settings automatically from the Internet and  
then tap Next.  
Exchanging Messages 1ꢀꢃ  
4. In Your e-mail provider, select Custom domain and then tap Next.  
5. Enter the domain of your e-mail provider and then tap Next.  
6. The E-mail Setup wizard then tries to find the e-mail provider settings on your  
device or from the Internet. If the settings are found, it shows a successful  
message. Tap Next.  
7. Enter Your name and the Account display name and then tap Next.  
Note If the E-mail Setup wizard was unsuccessful in finding the settings, you will be  
prompted to enter e-mail server settings on the succeeding screens. See “To  
specify e-mail server settingsfor details.  
8. In the Automatic Send/Receive list, choose how frequent you want e-mail  
messages to be automatically sent and downloaded on your device.  
Note Tap Review all download settings to select download options, set the e-mail  
format as HTML or plain text, and more. For more information, see “To customize  
download and format settings."  
9. Tap Finish.  
6.6 Using E-mail  
After setting up e-mail accounts on your device, you can start sending and  
receiving e-mail messages.  
Create a new e-mail message  
Depending on your preference, there are two ways you can create a new e-mail  
message.  
To start from an empty message  
1. On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, slide to the Mail tab.  
2. Select the e-mail account you want to use on the right side of the screen.  
Tip  
To choose from other e-mail accounts that are not displayed on the Mail tab,  
touch Menu > Accounts > Accounts and then select an e-mail account from the  
Account Picker screen.  
 
1ꢀ8 Exchanging Messages  
3. Touch the New E-mail icon (  
) to create a new e-mail.  
To send an e-mail to a favorite contact  
1. On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, slide to the People tab.  
2. Swipe your finger on the screen to flip through the photos of your favorite  
contacts.  
3. When the photo of the desired contact is displayed, touch the displayed  
photo and then touch Send e-mail.  
For more information about working with favorite contacts, seePeoplein Chapter ꢁ.  
Tip  
You can also touch Start > Contacts, select a contact name, and then touch Send e-mail.  
Compose and send an e-mail  
After creating a new e-mail, follow the steps below to enter your message and then  
send it.  
1. To add recipients, enter their e-mail addresses, separating them with a  
semicolon. You can also tap To if you want to add e-mail addresses stored in  
Contacts.  
2. Enter a subject and compose your message.  
Tip  
To choose from preset messages, tap Menu > My Text and tap a desired  
message. To check the spelling, tap Menu > Spell Check.  
3. Tap Send.  
Tips  
For more information about entering text and symbols, see Chapter 4.  
To set the message priority, tap Menu > Message Options.  
If you are working offline, e-mail messages are moved to the Outbox folder and  
will be sent the next time you connect.  
To add an attachment to a message  
1. In the message that you are composing, tap Menu > Insert and tap the item  
you want to attach: Picture, Voice Note, or File.  
2. Select the file or picture you want to attach, or record a voice note.  
Exchanging Messages 1ꢀ9  
Filter the Inbox message list  
When the Inbox on your device is full of  
messages, you can filter your Inbox to display  
only the messages that contain a particular  
sender or subject you are searching for.  
To filter your Inbox  
Enter the sender name or e-mail subject you  
want to look for. As you type characters, the  
message list narrows down to the sequence of  
characters you have entered.  
For example, entering “B, then “Enarrows the  
list to only the e-mails that contain sender names  
and e-mail subjects that start with “BE.”  
View and reply to messages  
To download a complete e-mail  
By default, each e-mail received in the inbox on your device contains only the  
first few kilobytes of the message. When you open an e-mail, it displays only the  
headers and part of the message. You must download the whole e-mail to view the  
complete content.  
To download a complete e-mail message, open the e-mail and then do one of the  
following:  
Finger-scroll to the end of the message, and tap Get entire message and  
any attachments (POPꢁ e-mail account) or tap Get the rest of this message  
(IMAP4 and Outlook e-mail accounts).  
Tap Menu > Download Message.  
1ꢁ0 Exchanging Messages  
Notes  
The Fetch Mail feature, which is available for POPꢁ and IMAP4 Internet e-mail  
accounts, downloads an entire e-mail without the need for you to perform a full  
synchronization. This limits the download to just the e-mail message that you want  
and helps save data cost.  
Fetch Mail is also available for Outlook E-mail. See “Instant download through  
Fetch Mailin Chapter ꢃ for details.  
Download may take some time, depending on the speed of your Internet  
connection, size of the whole e-mail, and whether file attachments are  
automatically downloaded.  
To download file attachments  
POP3 e-mail account:  
File attachments of a POPꢁ Internet e-mail account are automatically  
downloaded when you download a complete e-mail.  
IMAP4 and Outlook e-mail accounts:  
File attachments appear below the subject of an e-mail message. Tapping an  
attachment opens the attachment if it has been fully downloaded or marks it  
for download the next time you send and receive e-mail.  
You can set automatic download of file attachments. See “Customize e-mail  
settingsin this chapter for details.  
To reply to or forward a message  
1. Open the message and tap Menu > Reply, Menu > Reply All, or  
Menu > Forward.  
2. Enter your response, then tap Send.  
Notes  
You can receive and view HTML e-mails from any type of e-mail account. The  
HTML format is retained, without layout shifting or resizing. HTML e-mail support  
in Outlook Mobile is available only if you are synchronizing your device with  
Microsoft Exchange Server ꢀ00ꢃ.  
When replying using an Outlook e-mail account, you can customize ActiveSync  
to exclude addresses, including your own, from being added to the recipient list.  
Tap Menu > Options in ActiveSync, select the E-mail item, tap Settings, then tap  
Advanced. In the My e-mail addresses text box, enter e-mail addresses you want  
to exclude.  
Exchanging Messages 1ꢁ1  
Synchronize e-mails  
Synchronizing e-mails ensures that new e-mails are downloaded to the device  
Inbox folder, e-mails in the Outbox folder are sent, and e-mails deleted from the  
server are removed from your device. The manner in which you synchronize e-mails  
depends on the type of e-mail account you have.  
To automatically synchronize an Outlook e-mail account  
1. Connect your device to your computer through USB or Bluetooth.  
Otherwise, connect through Wi-Fi, or a data connection if you are  
synchronizing Outlook e-mail with the Exchange Server. For more  
information, see Chapter ꢃ.  
2. Synchronization automatically begins, and your device sends and receives  
Outlook e-mail.  
To manually synchronize your Outlook or Internet e-mail account  
1. Select your Internet e-mail account. (See “To select a messaging accountin  
this chapter.)  
2. Tap Menu > Send/Receive.  
Customize e-mail settings  
To change the download size and format for Outlook e-mail  
1. Disconnect your device from the computer.  
2. Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync.  
3. Tap Menu > Options, select E-mail, then tap Settings.  
4. On the E-mail Sync Options screen:  
Under Message format, select HTML or Plain Text. HTML is only available  
when connected to Microsoft Exchange Server ꢀ00ꢃ or later.  
Under Download size limit, select the desired e-mail size.  
5. Close ActiveSync and reconnect your device to the computer.  
1ꢁꢀ Exchanging Messages  
To change the download size and format for Internet e-mail  
1. Tap Menu > Options on the Account Picker screen, or tap Menu > Tools >  
Options while you’re in a message list.  
2. Tap your POPꢁ or IMAP4 Internet e-mail account.  
3. Tap Download Size Settings.  
4. Under Message format, select HTML or Plain Text.  
5. Under Download size limit, select the desired e-mail size.  
6. Tap Done.  
To automatically receive attachments on Outlook e-mails  
1. Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync.  
2. Tap Menu > Options.  
3. Tap E-mail > Settings, then select Include file attachments.  
To automatically receive attachments on IMAP4 e-mails  
1. Tap Menu > Options on the Account Picker screen, or tap Menu > Tools >  
Options while you’re in a message list.  
2. Tap the name of your IMAP4 e-mail account.  
3. Tap Download Size Settings.  
4. In Download attachments:  
Select All attachments to always download file attachments; or  
Select a file size limit for auto-downloading attachments.  
5. Tap Done.  
To store attachments on the storage card  
1. Tap Start > Messaging.  
2. Tap Menu > Options > Storage tab.  
3. Select the When available, use this storage card to store attachments  
check box.  
1ꢁ4 Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments  
7.1 Synchronizing with the Exchange Server  
To keep up-to-date with your company e-mails and meeting schedules while you’re  
out of the office, you can connect your device to the Internet through Wi-Fi or a  
data connection and synchronize with your company’s Exchange Server.  
Set up an Exchange Server connection  
Before you can synchronize or access information on the Exchange Server, you  
need to set up an Exchange Server connection on your device. You need to get the  
following information from your network administrator and enter them on your  
device:  
Exchange Server name (must be Outlook Web Access server name)  
Domain name  
User name and password that you use at work  
If you have not synchronized your device with your computer, follow these steps to  
set up an Exchange Server connection.  
1. Add a new e-mail account. See “Add an e-mail accountin Chapter ꢂ for  
instructions.  
2. Enter the E-mail address and Password for the e-mail account and select the  
Save password option. Tap Next.  
3. Clear the Try to get e-mail settings automatically from the Internet option  
and tap Next.  
4. In Your e-mail provider, select Exchange server and tap Next.  
5. Tap Next again.  
6. Select the Attempt to detect Exchange Server Settings automatically  
option and tap Next.  
7. Enter the Domain name and tap Next.  
8. In Server address, enter the Exchange Server address and tap Next.  
 
Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments 1ꢁ5  
9. Select the items that you want to sync with the Exchange Server.  
Tips • To change synchronization settings of an information item, for example, E-mail,  
select the item, then tap Settings.  
To change the rules for resolving synchronization conflicts, tap Menu >  
Advanced.  
10.Tap Finish.  
Notes  
If you synchronized e-mails with your computer before, open ActiveSync on  
your device, then tap Menu > Add Server Source to set up an Exchange Server  
connection. When prompted to select information types for synchronization, you  
must first clear the E-mail check box under the Windows PC item before you can  
select E-mail under Exchange Server.  
To change Exchange Server settings, open ActiveSync on your device, then tap  
Menu > Configure Server.  
Start synchronization  
Before you start synchronizing with the Exchange Server, make sure your device  
has been set up with a Wi-Fi or data connection to the Internet so that you can  
synchronize over the air. For more information about connections, see Chapter 8.  
After you finish setting up an Exchange Server connection, your device  
automatically starts synchronization.  
To manually start synchronization, you can do one of the following:  
On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then touch  
Sync Data; or  
Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync and then tap Sync.  
Note  
If you connect your device to your office computer via a USB or Bluetooth connection,  
you can use this connection to the computer to “pass throughto the network and  
download Outlook e-mails and other information to your device.  
1ꢁꢂ Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments  
7.2 Working With Company E-mails  
Your device gives you instant access to your company e-mails and lets you manage  
your messages easier. Direct Push, Fetch Mail, Remote e-mail search, and e-mail  
flags are just some of the tools you can use to manage your e-mails.  
Note  
Some messaging features depend on the Microsoft Exchange Server version used in  
your company. Check with your network administrator for the availability of these  
features.  
Automatic synchronization through Direct Push  
Direct Push technology (push e-mail feature) enables you to receive new e-mails on  
your device as soon as they arrive in your Inbox on the Exchange Server. Items such  
as contacts, calendar and tasks are also immediately updated onto your device when  
these items have been changed or new entries have been added on the Exchange  
Server. To make Direct Push work, you need to have a Wi-Fi or data connection on  
your device.  
You need to perform a full synchronization between your device and the Exchange  
Server first before Direct Push can be enabled.  
Requirement  
The Direct Push feature works for your device only if your company is using  
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2 (SP2) with Exchange  
ActiveSync or higher version.  
To turn on Direct Push in Comm Manager  
1. To open the Comm Manager, slide to the Settings tab on the TouchFLO ꢁD  
Home screen and then touch Communications.  
Tip  
You can also tap Start > Programs > Comm Manager.  
2. On the Comm Manager screen, touch Microsoft Direct Push.  
To turn on Direct Push in ActiveSync  
1. Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync and then tap Menu > Schedule.  
 
Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments 1ꢁꢃ  
2. Select As items arrive in the Peak times and Off-peak times boxes.  
Note  
When Direct Push is off, you need to manually retrieve your e-mails.  
Scheduled synchronization  
If you do not want to use Direct Push, you can set a regular schedule for  
synchronizing Outlook e-mail and information.  
1. In ActiveSync on your device, tap Menu > Schedule.  
2. Select a shorter time interval in the Peak times box for you to be able to  
receive e-mails more frequently. (Peak times usually refer to your working  
hours when e-mail volume is high).  
3. Select a longer interval in the Off-peak times box.  
Tip  
To set the days and hours that make up your peak and off-peak times, tap the  
peak times link at the bottom of the screen.  
Instant download through Fetch Mail  
The Fetch Mail feature downloads an entire e-mail immediately without the need  
for you to perform a full Send/Receive action. This limits the download to just the  
e-mail message that you want and helps save data cost.  
Requirement  
Fetch Mail works for your device only if your company is using Microsoft  
Exchange Server 2007 or higher.  
1. On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, slide to the Mail tab, select your Outlook  
account, and then tap Inbox.  
Tip  
You can also tap Start > Messaging > Outlook E-mail.  
2. Open an e-mail message.  
3. By default, only the first few words of the message is shown. To download the  
whole e-mail, finger-scroll to the end of the message, then tap Get the rest  
of this message.  
4. Wait for the remainder of the message body to download.  
1ꢁ8 Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments  
Notes  
For information about changing e-mail sync options such as setting the download  
size for e-mail, see "Customize e-mail settings" in Chapter ꢂ.  
When you receive an e-mail that contains a link to a document such as a PDF or  
Microsoft Office document located on SharePoint or an internal file server, you  
can tap the link to view the document on your device. You can view the document  
only if you have a Microsoft Outlook account that synchronizes with Microsoft  
Exchange Server ꢀ00ꢃ or later. Exchange Server must also be set up to allow access  
to SharePoint document libraries or internal file servers.  
Search for e-mails on the Exchange Server  
You can access e-mails that are not available on your device by searching your  
Microsoft Exchange Server mailbox. The search results are downloaded and  
displayed in a Search Results folder.  
Requirement  
Your company must be using Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or higher.  
1. Tap Start > Messaging > Outlook E-mail.  
2. Tap Menu > Tools > Search Server.  
3. In the Look for text box, enter the search keyword.  
4. Choose the date range of messages to search from.  
5. In the Look in list, specify whether to search in the Inbox, Sent Items, or All  
Folders.  
6. Tap Search.  
Tip  
To clear the search results and return to the message list, tap Menu > Clear Results.  
Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments 1ꢁ9  
Flag your messages  
Flags serve as a reminder for you to follow-up on important issues or requests  
contained in e-mail messages. Flagging messages, which has been a useful feature  
on desktop Outlook E-mail, can also be done in Outlook Mobile on your device. You  
can flag received e-mail messages on your device.  
Requirement  
Flags are enabled only if e-mails are synchronized with Microsoft Exchange  
Server 2007 or higher. Flags are disabled or hidden if e-mails are  
synchronized with earlier versions of Microsoft Exchange Server.  
To flag or unflag a message  
1. Open Outlook on your device and access the Inbox.  
2. Select a message or open a message.  
3. Tap Menu > Follow Up and select one of the  
following options:  
Set Flag Mark the message with a red flag  
to indicate that it needs follow up.  
Complete Flag Mark the message with a  
check mark to indicate that the issue or  
request in the e-mail is already completed.  
Clear Flag Remove the flag to unmark the  
message.  
Note  
E-mail message reminders are displayed on your  
device if the messages are flagged with reminders  
and synchronized from the Exchange Server.  
140 Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments  
Out-of-office auto-reply  
Outlook Mobile allows you to retrieve and change  
your out-of-office status. Just like desktop Outlook  
E-mail, Outlook Mobile automatically sends an auto-  
reply message when you’re not available.  
To send out-of-office auto-reply messages  
1. Tap Start > Messaging > Outlook E-mail.  
2. Tap Menu > Tools > Out of Office.  
3. In the I am currently list, select Out of the  
Office.  
4. Enter your auto-reply message, then tap Done.  
7.3 Managing Meeting Requests  
When you schedule and send meeting requests from your device, you can invite  
attendees to your meeting and check their status to know about their availability.  
When you receive a meeting request, you can reply by accepting or declining  
the request. The meeting request also clearly indicates whether or not there are  
conflicting or adjacent meetings.  
Requirement  
Your company must be using Microsoft Exchange Server 2007 or higher.  
To reply to a meeting request  
1. When you receive a meeting request e-mail, a notification will be displayed  
on your device. Open the e-mail.  
2. Tap Accept to reply and accept the meeting request, or tap Menu > Decline  
if you cannot attend the meeting.  
 
Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments 141  
Tips  
Before responding, you can check your availability during the time of the  
requested meeting by tapping View your calendar.  
If the time of the meeting conflicts with your other appointments, a  
“Scheduling Conflictstatus appears on top of the e-mail.  
3. Choose whether or not to edit your response e-mail before sending, then tap OK.  
If you accepted the meeting request, it will automatically be added as an  
appointment in Calendar on your device.  
To view the list of meeting participants  
1. Tap Start > Calendar.  
2. Tap a meeting request that you sent and then tap Attendees. The required  
and optional attendees will be listed.  
Icons indicating whether each attendee has accepted or declined the  
meeting request will also be displayed.  
Note To see the icon indicators in the attendees list, make sure Calendar is  
synchronized with the Exchange Server.  
14ꢀ Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments  
Tips  
For information about creating a meeting request, see “To send a meeting request”  
in Chapter 1ꢀ.  
To view an attendee’s contact information, tap the attendee’s name. If the attendee  
is included in your contacts list, you will see the contact information immediately.  
If the attendee is not in your contacts list, tap Company Directory to view the  
contact information.  
7.4 Finding Contacts in the Company Directory  
In addition to having contacts on your device, you can access contact information  
from your organization’s Company Directory. By having over-the-air access to the  
Company Directory, you can easily send e-mail messages and meeting requests to  
anyone in your company.  
Requirement  
Access to the Company Directory is available only if your organization is  
running Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 SP2 or higher, and you have  
completed your first synchronization with the Exchange Server.  
1. Synchronize with the Exchange Server.  
2. Do any of the following:  
In Contacts, tap Menu > Company Directory.  
 
Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments 14ꢁ  
In a new e-mail message, tap the To box (or tap Menu > Add Recipient),  
then tap Company Directory on the top of the list.  
When creating a meeting request and selecting required and optional  
attendees in Calendar, tap Company Directory.  
144 Working With Company E-mails and Meeting Appointments  
3. Enter a partial or full contact name and tap Search. In the search results list,  
tap a contact to select it.  
Notes  
You can save a contact from the Company Directory to your device by selecting  
the contact, then tapping Menu > Save to Contacts.  
You can search on the following information as long as that information is included  
in the Company Directory: First name, Last name, E-mail name, Display name,  
E-mail address, or Office location.  
14ꢂ Internet  
8.1 Ways of Connecting to the Internet  
Your device’s networking capabilities allow you to access the Internet or your  
corporate network at work through one of the following connections:  
Wi-Fi  
GPRS/ꢁG (or EDGE when available)  
Dial-up  
Note  
You can also add and set up the following connections:  
VPN: A VPN connection is used to access your corporate network by using an  
existing Internet connection.  
Proxy: A Proxy connection is used to access the Internet using an existing  
connection to your corporate or WAP network.  
Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi provides wireless Internet access over distances of up to ꢁ00 feet (100 meters).  
To use Wi-Fi on your device, you need access to a wireless access point or “hotspot.  
Note  
The availability and range of your device’s Wi-Fi signal depends on the number,  
infrastructure, and other objects through which the signal passes.  
To turn Wi-Fi on and off  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab.  
2. On the Settings screen, tap Communications > Wi-Fi to enable/disable the  
wireless function.  
When enabled, the On indicator is activated and available wireless networks  
will be detected.  
 
Internet 14ꢃ  
To connect to a Wi-Fi network  
After Wi-Fi is turned on, your device scans for available Wi-Fi networks in your area.  
1. The network names of the detected wireless  
networks are displayed on a pop-up message  
window. Tap the desired Wi-Fi network, then  
tap OK.  
Note When you select an open (unsecured)  
network, you will be automatically connected  
to the network after tapping OK. You do not  
need to do steps ꢀ and ꢁ.  
2. On the next pop-up message window, do one  
of the following:  
Tap The Internet if the wireless network  
connects your device to the Internet.  
Tap Work if the wireless network connects  
your device to a private network.  
3. Enter the key and then tap Connect.  
Next time you use your device to detect Wi-Fi networks, you will not see the pop-up  
message windows again, and you will not be prompted to enter the network key of  
the previously accessed Wi-Fi network (unless you perform a hard reset which will  
erase custom settings on your device).  
Note  
Wi-Fi networks are self-discoverable, which means no additional steps are required for  
your device to connect to a Wi-Fi network. It may be necessary to provide a username  
and password for certain closed wireless networks.  
148 Internet  
To check Wi-Fi network status  
You can check the current Wi-Fi connection status from any of the following screens  
of your device:  
Title bar  
When you enable Wi-Fi on your device, the Wi-Fi ON icon appears on the  
title bar.  
After Wi-Fi is turned on, your device scans for available wireless networks and  
the wireless signal icon  
appears on the title bar. The arrows in this icon  
move back and forth while your device is scanning for a Wi-Fi network signal.  
Once your device successfully connects to a Wi-Fi network, the arrows stop  
moving.  
Wireless LAN screen  
On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab  
and then tap Menu > Wireless Networks. On  
the Main tab, you will see the Wi-Fi network that  
your device is currently connected to.  
The configuration and signal quality of the Wi-Fi  
network are also shown.  
Internet 149  
Configure Wireless Networks screen  
On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab  
and then tap All Settings. In the Connections  
tab, tap Wi-Fi, then tap the Wireless Networks  
button. This screen displays the Wi-Fi networks  
currently available.  
To connect to a Wi-Fi network in the list, tap and  
hold on the desired network, then tap Connect.  
Tap a Wi-Fi network in the list to view or change  
its connection settings.  
You can also add new Wi-Fi networks, if  
available, by tapping Add New.  
To save battery power while connected to a Wi-Fi network  
Using Wi-Fi quickly consumes battery power. Turn off Wi-Fi when not in use. You can  
also enable power saving settings.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab.  
2. On the Settings screen, tap Menu > Wireless  
Networks > Power Mode tab.  
3. On the Power Mode tab, move the Power  
Save Mode slider to a position that optimizes  
performance with the least power consumption.  
For example, move the slider to the left (Best  
Performance) to have the optimal wireless  
network performance; move to the right (Best  
Battery) to obtain the maximum battery usage.  
150 Internet  
GPRS/3G  
Use GPRS/3G (or EDGE, if available) to connect to the Internet and to send and  
receive e-mail on your device. You will need a data plan to use your wireless service  
provider’s GPRS/ꢁG network. Check with your wireless service provider to find out  
about GPRS/ꢁG rates.  
GPRS/ꢁG settings are already preconfigured on your device, and your device is  
ready to use your wireless service provider’s GPRS/ꢁG services. Do not change the  
settings as this may cause services to stop working.  
To add a new GPRS/3G connection  
When you need to add another GPRS/ꢁG connection on your device, obtain the  
Access point name from your wireless service provider. Also, check if the GPRS/ꢁG  
network requires a user name and password.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab  
and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the Connections tab, tap Connections.  
3. In My ISP, tap Add a new modem  
connection.  
4. On the Make New Connection screen, enter a  
name for the connection.  
Internet 151  
5. In the Select a modem list, select Cellular  
Line (GPRS , 3G), then tap Next.  
6. Enter the Access point name, then tap Next.  
7. Enter the user name and password, if required,  
then tap Finish.  
Notes  
To view help information for any screen, tap the  
help icon ( ).  
To modify your connection settings, tap  
Manage existing connections and then tap  
Edit.  
Dial-up  
To set up a dial-up connection to your Internet Service Provider (ISP) on your  
device, you need the same settings that you normally use when you dial up from  
your computer. This includes the ISP server phone number, your user name and  
password.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the Connections tab, tap Connections.  
3. In My ISP, tap Add a new modem connection.  
4. In the Select a modem list, select Cellular Line, then tap Next.  
5. Enter the ISP server phone number, then tap Next.  
6. Enter your user name, password, and any other information required by your  
ISP, then tap Finish.  
15ꢀ Internet  
8.2 Starting a Data Connection  
After setting up a data connection such as GPRS/ꢁG or ISP dial-up on your device,  
you can now connect your device to the Internet. The connection is started  
automatically when you begin using a program that accesses the Internet such as  
Opera Mobile.  
To manually start a data connection  
If you have set up multiple types of data connections on your device, you can  
manually start a connection.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the Connections tab, tap Connections.  
3. Tap Manage existing connections.  
4. Tap and hold the name of the desired connection, then tap Connect.  
To disconnect active data connections  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Comm Manager.  
2. Tap the Data Connection button.  
 
Internet 15ꢁ  
8.3 Using Opera Mobile™  
Opera Mobile™ is a full-featured Internet browser, optimized for use on your  
device.  
Note  
You can also use Internet Explorer® Mobile to browse the web. To open Internet  
Explorer Mobile, tap Start > Internet Explorer.  
1
2
8
3
4
5
6
7
9
10  
1
2
3
4
Refresh. Tap to reload the web page being viewed.  
Address bar. Enter the URL of the web site here.  
Back. Tap to go back to the previous web page viewed.  
Bookmarks. Tap to go to the Bookmarks screen where you can add a bookmark,  
edit bookmarked web pages, and send the favorite URL link via one of the  
Messaging accounts.  
 
154 Internet  
5
6
7
Tabs. Tap to add a new browsing tab or switch to another existing browsing tab.  
Home. Tap to go to the Home page.  
Menu. Tap to open a list where you can change Opera Mobile settings, check  
downloads, view History, and more.  
8
9
Close tab. Tap to close the current tab. This is only enabled if you have more  
than one tab opened.  
Zoom. Tap to open the Zoom bar. See “Zoom in and out on web pagesfor more  
details.  
10 Exit Full Screen mode. When browsing the web, Opera Mobile automatically  
switches to Full screen mode. Tap to show the address and Menu bars again.  
To open Opera Mobile  
On the Home screen, slide to the Internet tab and then tap Browser.  
To go to a web site  
1. On the Opera Mobile screen, tap the address bar.  
2. Enter the URL address and tap  
.
Address bar  
Search field  
Tip  
When you tap the address bar, a search field also appears. Quickly search the web by  
entering the search item and tapping  
.
Internet 155  
View web pages  
While browsing web pages, use finger  
gestures to pan on the web page.  
Tip  
Touch and hold an empty area on a web  
page to open a shortcut menu that lets  
you go back to the previous page, reload  
the page, add the page as a Favorite, and  
more. You can also tap and hold a link or  
image on a web page to open a menu with  
different options.  
Zoom in and out on web pages  
While viewing a web page in full screen, you  
can do one of the following to zoom in and  
out:  
Tap  
at the bottom-left corner of the  
screen to display the Zoom bar. Tap and  
drag the circle on the Zoom bar to the  
right or left to zoom in or out of the web  
page.  
Tap the screen twice to zoom in. To  
zoom out, tap the screen twice again.  
Slider  
Zoom  
bar  
15ꢂ Internet  
Change the screen orientation  
Change the screen  
orientation by simply  
turning your device  
sideways.  
Opera Mobile menu  
On the menu bar, tap  
to open the menu.  
Tap to open the Settings screen where you  
can set the default home page, change display  
settings, set privacy settings, and more.  
Tap to view items being downloaded. You  
can also resume or stop current downloads.  
Tap to view information about the Web  
page you are browsing.  
Tap to see web pages that you have viewed.  
Tap to manage and view web pages that you  
have saved.  
Tap to open the Opera Mobile help file.  
Tap to close Opera Mobile completely.  
Opera Mobile will not run in the background.  
Note:  
For more information about using Opera Mobile, go to:  
http://www.opera.com/products/mobile/  
Internet 15ꢃ  
8.4 Using YouTube™  
YouTube™ lets you browse, search, and watch video clips from the YouTube server.  
Note  
You need an active connection to use YouTube. If you are using a GPRS/ꢁG  
connection, your data connection bill may increase significantly due to large file sizes  
of the videos.  
To open YouTube  
Tap Start > Programs > YouTube.  
Displays the current program  
channel being viewed.  
Tap to set video  
Tap to open the  
Program Guide list.  
playback quality.  
Tap to close the  
YouTube.  
Tap the arrows to  
filter the list by Most  
Viewed, Top Rated,  
and Featured.  
Displays the available  
videos for the  
selected program  
channel. Tap a video  
to watch it. Tap  
to view details about  
the video.  
Tap to switch  
between the  
different YouTube  
screens.  
 
158 Internet  
Browse for videos  
The Program Guide list lets you change the program channel so you can browse  
different types of videos available on the YouTube server. By default, there is only  
one channel in the Program Guide.  
To add a new program channel into the Program Guide list  
1. On the YouTube screen, tap  
.
2. On the Search screen, enter the  
channel you want to add to the  
Program Guide list.  
3. Tap Search. YouTube searches for  
the channel and then displays the  
available videos from it.  
4. Tap  
and then on the  
confirmation screen, tap OK. The  
channel you just subscribed to  
will now be shown when you tap  
Program Guide.  
Tip  
You can also add a YouTube user as a  
program channel. To add, tap  
any of the YouTube screens and then  
tap  
in  
.
To change the program channel  
1. On the Videos screen, tap Program Guide at the top of the screen.  
2. On the Program Guide list, select a channel.  
3. The video list refreshes to display the available videos for the newly selected  
channel.  
Internet 159  
To delete a program channel from the Program Guide list  
You can only delete program channels that you have added to the Program Guide list.  
1. On the Videos screen, tap Program Guide.  
2. Scroll down to the channel you want to delete and then tap  
.
3. On the confirmation screen, tap Yes.  
Watching videos  
On the Videos, Bookmarks, or History screen, tap a video to launch the YouTube  
Video Player.  
Drag to go forward or  
backward in the video.  
Download  
progress  
Buffered video  
Tap to resize  
Tap to go back to  
the video to  
the beginning of the  
fit the screen.  
video. .  
Tap again to go  
back to actual  
size.  
Tap to toggle  
between playing  
and pausing the  
video.  
Tap to stop the  
video playback.  
Tip  
To adjust the volume, press the VOLUME UP and VOLUME DOWN buttons on the side  
of the device.  
When you tap Stop (  
) or finish watching the entire video, you are presented  
with options on what you can do next.  
1ꢂ0 Internet  
Tap to go to the  
next page of  
related videos.  
If no action  
is taken, it  
automatically goes  
to the next page  
after 10 seconds.  
Tap to view details  
about the video  
you just watched.  
Tap to go back to  
the previous page  
of related videos.  
Tap to send the link  
to the video you just  
watched to another  
person using one  
of the Messaging  
accounts.  
Tap to add the video  
to your Bookmarks.  
Tap to play back  
the video again.  
Bookmarks  
You can store frequently viewed videos into Bookmarks for quick access.  
To view Bookmarks  
On the YouTube screen, tap  
watch it.  
. Tap a video to  
To add a video into Bookmarks  
Do one of the following:  
After watching a video, tap  
.
On the list of videos, tap  
you want to add to Bookmarks and then tap  
on the video  
.
Internet 1ꢂ1  
To delete a video from Bookmarks  
1. On the Bookmarks screen, tap Edit.  
2. Tap  
on the video you want to remove from Bookmarks.  
3. On the confirmation screen, tap Yes.  
4. Tap Done.  
History  
View recently watched videos on the History screen.  
To view History  
On the YouTube screen, tap  
. Tap a video to watch it.  
Note  
To clear the History list, tap Clear.  
1ꢂꢀ Internet  
8.5 Using Streaming Media  
Streaming Media lets you stream live broadcasts or on-demand media content  
from the web. The media is sent in a continuous stream to your device and is played  
as it arrives, along with the audio.  
The Streaming Media program allows you to play 3GP and MPEG-4 files. It also  
supports playback of SDP (Session Description Protocol) files.  
To access streaming content via Opera Mobile  
In Opera Mobile, you can open a web page containing RTSP (Real Time Streaming  
Protocol) links to streaming media content then play the content in the Streaming  
Media program.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Internet tab and tap Browser.  
2. In the address bar, enter the URL address of the web page that contains the  
RTSP link to the desired *.ꢁgp, *.mp4, or *.sdp file.  
3. On the web page, tap the RTSP link.  
4. Streaming Media then automatically opens and starts playing the file. During  
playback, use the button controls to play/pause, switch to full screen, rewind,  
and fast forward.  
 
Internet 1ꢂꢁ  
Rewind  
Tap to toggle  
Drag to go  
backward or forward  
on the video.  
between playing  
or pausing the  
video playback.  
Tap to switch to full  
screen mode. In full  
screen mode, tap the  
screen to switch back.  
Fast forward  
To stream media files directly on the Streaming Media Player  
Streaming Media only supports RTSP links when you stream *.ꢁgp and *.mp4 files  
directly on the program.  
Note  
Before you launch the Streaming Media program, make sure that you are connected  
to the Internet.  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Streaming Media.  
2. From the program, tap Connect.  
3. Enter the URL for the web site (rtsp://) and the file name.  
4. Tap Connect.  
5. Streaming Media then starts playing the file. During playback, use the button  
controls to play/pause, switch to full screen, rewind, and fast forward.  
1ꢂ4 Internet  
To view streaming video information  
Tap Menu > Properties to view the properties and general information of a  
streaming video clip, such as video codec, audio codec, dimension, frames, and  
duration of the video.  
To configure streaming video connection settings  
Tap Menu > Options to configure the Streaming Media settings:  
Playback tab  
Media buffer. Specify the memory space (in terms of duration) to allot for  
storing video and audio data while streaming media.  
Do not show ‘Connect to internet’ message. Clear this option if you want to  
show the Connect to internet message everytime you connect to the Internet  
to stream videos.  
Networks tab  
Connect via. Choose whether you want to connect to the Internet or  
corporate network (intranet) to locate a streaming video clip.  
UDP port range. Specify a range of port numbers to use for streaming.  
Video tab  
Use Landscape mode when watching in full screen. Select this option  
if you want the screen to switch into landscape mode when you watch a  
streaming video in full screen.  
Internet 1ꢂ5  
8.6 Using Windows Live™  
Windows Live™ gives you a full Internet experience on your device. Windows Live™  
helps you to find information, pursue your interests, and get in touch with friends  
and family on the Internet easier.  
Windows Live™ offers the following key features:  
Live Search Bar, which lets you search for information on the web.  
Live Messenger, the next generation of MSN Messenger Mobile.  
Live Mail, the next generation of Hotmail.  
Live Contacts, your address book for storing Live Mail, Live Messenger and  
Hotmail contacts.  
Set up Windows Live™  
The first time you use Windows Live™, sign in using your Windows Live™ ID, which is  
your Windows Live™ Mail or Hotmail address, and password.  
To set up Windows Live™ for the first time  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Windows Live and then tap Sign in to Windows  
Live.  
2. Tap the links to read the Windows Live™ Term of Use and the Microsoft  
Privacy Statement. After reviewing them, tap Accept.  
3. Enter your Windows Live™ Mail or Hotmail address and password, select the  
Save password checkbox, then tap Next.  
4. Tap Next.  
 
1ꢂꢂ Internet  
5. Choose what information you want to sync  
online with your device.  
If you select Store Windows Live contacts  
in your mobile phone’s contact list, your  
Windows Live™ contacts will be added to the  
contact list and to Windows Live™ Messenger  
on your device.  
If you select Sync e-mail, your Windows  
Live™ Mail or Hotmail inbox messages will be  
downloaded to your device.  
6. Tap Next.  
7. After synchronization is complete, tap Done.  
The Windows Live™ interface  
On the Windows Live™ main screen, you will  
see a search bar, navigation buttons, and an  
area where you can show and customize your  
profile.  
1
2
1
2
Search bar  
Navigation buttons. Tap the left  
or right arrow to switch between  
Windows Live™ Messenger, Windows  
Live™ Mail, and Sync status.  
3
4
Tap Menu to access and change  
settings.  
Tap to change the display name,  
picture, or personal message.  
3
4
Internet 1ꢂꢃ  
Windows Live™ Messenger  
With this mobile version of Windows Live™ Messenger, you enjoy many of the  
same cool features that you get from the desktop version, which include the  
following:  
Instant messaging via text and voice  
Multiple conversations  
Insert emoticons  
Contact list with presence  
Send and receive files including photos  
Change status/display name  
View contacts by online status, groups, and  
more  
Send messages even when a contact is  
offline  
Note  
Before you can use Windows Live™ Messenger,  
your device must be connected to the Internet.  
For information about setting up an Internet  
connection, see “Ways of Connecting to the  
Internetin this chapter.  
Launch Messenger and sign in  
To open Windows Live™ Messenger  
Do one of the following:  
Tap Start > Programs > Messenger.  
On the Windows Live™ main screen, tap the left or right arrow until you see  
Messenger, then tap it.  
1ꢂ8 Internet  
To sign in and out  
1. Tap Sign in on the Messenger screen.  
2. If this is your first time to sign in, a message appears to inform you that your  
messenger contacts will be added to the contact list on your device. Tap OK  
to add them.  
Signing in may take several minutes, depending on your connection speed.  
3. To sign out, tap Menu > Sign Out.  
To start and end conversations  
1. In the contact list, select a contact, then tap Send IM to open a message screen.  
2. Enter your text message in the text entry area of the message screen.  
3. To add an emoticon, tap Menu > Add emoticon then tap an icon from the list.  
4. Tap Send.  
5. To end a conversation with the current contact, tap Menu > End conversation.  
Tips  
To send a file, tap Menu > Send. You can choose to send a picture, voice clip or any  
file.  
To invite one or more contacts to the conversation, tap Menu > Options >  
Add participant.  
To send a voice message, tap Voice Clip on a message screen then start talking.  
After you have recorded a message, tap Send.  
Add Windows Live™ contacts  
You can add new Windows Live™ contacts in Windows Live™ Messenger or in  
Contacts.  
To add a Windows Live™ contact in Live Messenger  
1. Tap Menu > Add new contact.  
2. Enter the e-mail address of the contact, then tap OK.  
Internet 1ꢂ9  
To add a Windows Live™ contact in Contacts  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the People tab and then tap All People.  
2. Tap New, then tap Windows Live.  
3. In the IM box, enter the e-mail address of the contact, which can be a  
Windows Live ID or any other e-mail address.  
Tip  
You can fill in other information about the contact, if desired. This is not  
necessary if you will communicate with the contact only through Windows Live™  
Messenger or Live Mail.  
4. Tap OK.  
5. Follow the remaining instructions to add the new contact to your Windows  
Live™ contact list.  
8.7 Using RSS Hub  
RSS Hub is an RSS reader that keeps you up-to-date with the latest news from the  
Internet. It monitors Internet news channels and downloads the most current news  
updates and podcasts so you are instantly informed of breaking news and events.  
For more information and tips on using RSS Hub, see Help on your device.  
Note  
Make sure you have an active Internet connection (such as GPRS/ꢁG or Wi-Fi) before  
using RSS Hub.  
Subscribe to and organize news channels  
You must subscribe to news channels before you can receive RSS feeds.  
 
1ꢃ0 Internet  
To subscribe to news channels  
1. Tap Start > Programs > RSS Hub, then tap Continue.  
2. In the New Channel Wizard screen, select the Choose from a list of known  
Channels option, then tap Next. A list of RSS channels is displayed.  
Category  
Channels  
Tap to load pre-selected RSS channels.  
Note If the RSS channel you want to subscribe to is not in the list of known channels,  
tap Back, then select another option on the New Channel Wizard screen. For  
more information on these other options, see the Help on your device.  
3. Select the checkboxes of the RSS channels you want to subscribe to, then tap  
Finish.  
Tip  
Channels are grouped by categories. If you want to select all channels in a  
category, select the category check box.  
4. The channel list appears. Tap Refresh to update the channels.  
Internet 1ꢃ1  
Tap to select the  
channel category  
to display  
Channel is  
updated. Tap  
it to view the  
headlines.  
Channel list  
Headline  
count  
Tap to cancel  
channel  
updating  
Tap to update  
the channels  
To add new channels  
1. In the channel list, tap Menu > Channel > New to open the New Channel  
Wizard screen.  
2. Select an option, then follow screen instructions to add new channels. For  
more information on New Channel Wizard options, see Help on your device.  
To filter the channels in the display  
In the channel list, tap Menu > View, then select:  
Updated to display only those channels with unread headlines.  
All to display all subscribed channels.  
1ꢃꢀ Internet  
Manage channel categories  
To view all the channels in a particular category, tap All Categories in the upper left  
area of the channel list, then tap the category you want to display.  
To add a new category, tap Menu > Categories in the channel list to display all  
categories, then tap Menu > New.  
To rename or delete a category, tap Menu > Categories in the channel list to  
display all categories, select a category, then tap Menu > Rename or Menu >  
Delete.  
If you want to change the channel category, tap and hold the channel in the  
channel list, then tap Change Category. Select a new category and tap OK.  
View and organize headlines  
Tap a channel in the channel list to display the headlines for that channel.  
Tap a headline to open  
the news summary  
screen  
Headline or news  
summary contains  
a keyword  
Audio/Video/Image  
file attachment is  
downloading  
Headline has  
been read  
Tap to play back or view  
the file attachment.  
New or unread  
headline  
Tap to download audio/  
video file attachment  
Tap to return to  
the channel list  
New or unread headlines display in bold and are marked with a blue newspaper  
icon. Headlines that have been read are marked with a gray newspaper icon.  
Internet 1ꢃꢁ  
View the news summary  
Tap a headline in the headline list to display the news summary.  
Channel name  
Audio/Video/Image  
Headline and  
read status  
file attachment.  
Tap to download  
the file.  
News summary  
Tap to open the news  
item in Opera Mobile.  
See “Using Opera  
Mobilein this chapter  
for details.  
Tap to return to  
the headline list  
To change view options  
In the news summary screen, tap Menu to change the text size, fit the text to the  
screen (text wrap), or enable ClearType for better viewing.  
1ꢃ4 Internet  
To download, play, or save podcasts  
1. When you see an audio or video file attachment  
in the news summary, do one of the following to  
download the file:  
Tap Menu > Podcasts > Start Download.  
Tap the Download audio/Download video  
link below the audio/video file icon.  
Tip  
To cancel the file download, tap Menu >  
Podcasts > Cancel Download, or tap Cancel  
download below the audio/video file icon.  
2. After downloading the file, do one of the following:  
Tap Menu > Podcasts > Play or tap  
Play audio/Play video below the audio/video  
file icon to play back the file.  
Tap Menu > Podcast > Save to save a copy of  
the file to the device’s main memory or storage  
card.  
To send the headline link via e-mail  
1. In the news summary screen, tap Menu > Send Link via Email.  
2. Messaging opens and displays the Account Picker screen. Tap the e-mail  
account you want to use to send the headline link.  
A new e-mail message is then created with the headline link.  
3. Specify the e-mail recipients, then send it.  
Note  
For more information on how to compose e-mails, see “Using E-mailin Chapter ꢂ.  
To view the next or previous news summary  
In the news summary screen, tap Menu > Next or Menu > Previous.  
Internet 1ꢃ5  
For more information about the features and how to configure RSS Hub, refer to the  
online help. To open the online help, tap Start > Help while in RSS Hub.  
8.8 Using Your Device as a Modem (Internet Sharing)  
Internet Sharing connects your desktop or notebook computer to the Internet  
by using your device’s data connection (GPRS/ꢁG, for instance). You can choose to  
connect via USB or Bluetooth.  
Notes  
Make sure your device has a SIM card installed, and your device has a GPRS/ꢁG or  
phone dial-up modem connection. If your device has not been set up with a data  
connection yet, tap Menu > Connection Settings on the Internet Sharing screen.  
For more information about setting up these connections, see “GPRS/ꢁGand  
“Dial-upin this chapter.  
If you want to use a USB cable connection, you must first install Windows Mobile  
Device Center or Microsoft ActiveSync version 4.5 or later on the computer.  
If you want to use a Bluetooth connection, make sure your computer has built-in  
Bluetooth capability. If your computer does not have Bluetooth, you can connect  
and use a Bluetooth adapter or dongle.  
Before using Internet Sharing, disconnect from Windows Mobile Device Center or  
ActiveSync on your computer.  
 
1ꢃꢂ Internet  
To set up your device as a USB modem  
1. Connect the device to your desktop or notebook  
computer using the USB sync cable.  
2. Do any of the following:  
When the Connect to PC screen appears,  
select Internet Sharing, then tap Done.  
On your device, tap Start > Programs >  
Internet Sharing.  
3. In the PC Connection list, select USB.  
4. In the Network Connection list, select the  
name of the connection that your device uses to  
connect to the Internet.  
5. Tap Connect.  
To use your device as a Bluetooth modem  
For the computer to use the Internet connection of your device, activate Internet  
Sharing on your device, then set up a Bluetooth Personal Area Network (PAN)  
between the computer and your device.  
1. On your device, turn on Bluetooth and set it to visible mode by following  
the steps in “To turn Bluetooth on and make your device visiblesection in  
Chapter 9.  
2. Initiate a Bluetooth partnership from your device by following the steps in “To  
create a Bluetooth partnership”  
3. Tap Start > Programs > Internet Sharing.  
4. Select Bluetooth PAN as the PC Connection.  
5. From the Network Connection list, select the name of the connection that  
your device uses to connect to the Internet.  
Internet 1ꢃꢃ  
6. Tap Connect.  
7. On your computer, set up a Bluetooth Personal Area Network (PAN) with your  
device:  
For Windows Vista:  
a. Click Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet > Network and  
Sharing Center.  
b. Click Manage network connections and then under Personal Area  
Network, double-click Bluetooth Network Connection.  
c. In the Bluetooth Personal Area Network Devices dialog box, select your  
device, then click Connect.  
For Windows XP:  
a. Tap Start > Control Panel > Network Connections.  
b. Under Personal Area Network, click the Bluetooth Network Connection  
icon.  
c. Under Network Tasks, click View Bluetooth network devices.  
d. In the Bluetooth Personal Area Network Devices dialog box, select your  
device, then click Connect.  
Note If the Bluetooth adapter or dongle on your computer was installed using a third-  
party provided driver, open the Bluetooth software that came with the Bluetooth  
adapter/dongle to connect your computer and device via Bluetooth. Refer to the  
Bluetooth adapter/dongle documentation for more information.  
8. On the Internet Sharing screen on your device, check if a connected  
status message is displayed, which indicates that your computer has been  
successfully connected to the Internet using your device as a Bluetooth  
modem.  
To end the Internet connection  
On the Internet Sharing screen, tap Disconnect.  
1ꢃ8 Internet  
180 Bluetooth  
9.1 Bluetooth Modes  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications technology. Devices with  
Bluetooth capabilities can exchange information over a distance of about eight  
meters without requiring a physical connection.  
Bluetooth on your device operates in three different modes:  
On. Bluetooth is turned on. Your device can detect other Bluetooth-enabled  
devices, but not vice versa.  
Visible. Bluetooth is turned on, and all other Bluetooth-enabled devices can  
detect your device.  
Off. Bluetooth is turned off. In this mode, you can neither send nor receive  
information using Bluetooth.  
Notes  
By default, Bluetooth is turned off. If you turn it on, then turn off your device,  
Bluetooth also turns off. When you turn on your device again, Bluetooth  
automatically turns on.  
Turn off Bluetooth when not in use to conserve battery power, or in places where  
using a wireless device is prohibited, such as on board an aircraft and in hospitals.  
To turn Bluetooth on and make your device visible  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap Menu >  
Bluetooth Devices > Mode tab.  
2. Select the Turn on Bluetooth and Make this device visible to other devices  
check boxes.  
3. Tap OK. The Title bar will show  
to indicate that the device is in Visible mode.  
To turn off Bluetooth visibility after a certain period of time  
You can automatically turn off Bluetooth visibility after a specified period of time.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap  
Menu > Bluetooth Devices > Timeout tab.  
2. In Turn off Visible mode, select the time before your device’s Bluetooth  
visibility turns off. Tap OK.  
 
Bluetooth 181  
9.2 Bluetooth Partnerships  
A Bluetooth partnership is a relationship that you create between your device and  
another Bluetooth-enabled device in order to exchange information in a secure  
manner.  
To create a Bluetooth partnership  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap Menu >  
Bluetooth Devices > Devices tab.  
2. Tap Add new device. Your device displays the names of other Bluetooth  
devices within range.  
3. Tap the device name in the box, then tap Next.  
4. Specify a passcode to establish a secure connection. The passcode can be 1  
up to 1ꢂ characters.  
5. Tap Next.  
6. Wait for the paired device to accept the partnership. The receiving party  
needs to enter the same passcode that you specified.  
7. After the receiving party enters the passcode, a message box appears on your  
device confirming the partnership.  
Tip  
Tap the device’s name in the Devices tab to change the paired device name and  
to set the services you want to use for the paired device. After setting the name  
and options, tap Save.  
8. Tap Done.  
Note  
Creating a Bluetooth partnership between two devices is a one-time process. Once  
a partnership is created, the devices can recognize the partnership and exchange  
information without entering a passcode again.  
To accept a Bluetooth partnership  
1. Ensure that Bluetooth is turned on and in visible mode.  
2. Tap Yes when prompted to establish a partnership with the other device.  
 
18ꢀ Bluetooth  
3. Enter a passcode (the same passcode that is entered on the device requesting  
the partnership) to establish a secure connection. The passcode must be  
between 1 and 1ꢂ characters.  
4. Tap Next.  
5. Tap Done. You can now exchange information with the paired device.  
Tips  
To rename a Bluetooth partnership, tap and hold the partnership’s name on the  
Devices tab of the Bluetooth screen, then tap Edit.  
To delete a Bluetooth partnership, tap and hold the partnership’s name on the  
Devices tab, then tap Delete.  
9.3 Connecting a Bluetooth Hands-free or Stereo  
Headset  
For hands-free phone conversations, you can use a Bluetooth hands-free headset  
such as a car kit with your device. Your device also supports AꢀDP (Advanced Audio  
Distribution Profile) which allows you to use a Bluetooth stereo headset for hands-  
free phone conversations and for listening to stereo music.  
To connect a Bluetooth hands-free or stereo headset  
1. Make sure that both your device and the Bluetooth headset are turned  
on and within close range, and that the headset is visible. Refer to the  
manufacturer’s documentation to find out how to set the headset in visible  
mode.  
2. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap Menu >  
Bluetooth Devices > Devices tab > Add new device.  
3. Tap the name of the Bluetooth headset, then tap Next. The device will  
automatically pair the device with the Bluetooth headset.  
 
Bluetooth 18ꢁ  
Windows Mobile will automatically try one of the preconfigured passcodes (0000,  
8888) to pair the Bluetooth headset with the device. If this fails, you have to enter  
the passcode delivered with your headset manually.  
Note  
If the Bluetooth stereo headset becomes disconnected, turn the headset on and  
repeat step 1 to ꢀ above. Tap and hold the name of the Bluetooth stereo headset and  
tap Set as Wireless Stereo.  
9.4 Beaming Information Using Bluetooth  
You can beam information, such as contacts, calendar items, tasks, and files from  
your device to your computer or to another Bluetooth-enabled device.  
Note  
If your computer does not have built-in Bluetooth capability, you need to connect  
and use a Bluetooth adapter or dongle on your computer.  
To beam information from your device to a computer  
1. Turn on Bluetooth on your device, and make your device visible. For  
information about this, seeTo turn Bluetooth on and make your device visible.  
2. Set Bluetooth on your computer to visible mode, create a Bluetooth  
partnership, then enable your computer to receive Bluetooth beams.  
Note If the Bluetooth adapter or dongle on your computer was installed using a third-  
party provided driver, open the Bluetooth software that came with the Bluetooth  
adapter/dongle and enable the adapter/dongle to be discovered by other  
devices. Refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s documentation for more information.  
If your computer has Windows Vista or Windows XP SP2 and your  
computer’s Bluetooth adapter is supported by your Windows version, do the  
following steps:  
a. On your computer, open Bluetooth Devices from the Control Panel, then  
click the Options tab on the Bluetooth Devices window.  
b. For Windows Vista, select Allow Bluetooth devices to find this  
computer.  
 
184 Bluetooth  
For Windows XP, select Turn discovery on and Allow Bluetooth devices  
to connect to this computer.  
c. Create a Bluetooth partnership between your device and computer. For  
information about creating a partnership, see “Bluetooth partnerships.  
d. In the Options tab of Bluetooth Devices, select Show the Bluetooth  
icon in the notification area.  
e. To enable your computer to receive Bluetooth beams, right-click the  
Bluetooth icon in the notification area at the bottom-right corner of  
your computer screen and select Receive a File. You are now ready to  
beam.  
3. On your device, select an item to beam. The item can be an appointment in  
your calendar, a task, a contact card, or a file.  
4. To beam a contact, tap Menu > Send Contact > Beam.  
To beam other types of information, tap Menu > Beam [type of item].  
5. Tap the device name to which you want to send the item.  
6. If you beamed a calendar, task, or contact item to your computer and it is not  
automatically added to Outlook, select File > Import and Export in Outlook  
to import it.  
To beam information to a Bluetooth-enabled device such as another Windows  
Mobile-powered device, follow steps 1 to 5 in the above procedure.  
Tips  
The default folder on your computer where beamed items are stored may be  
C:\Documents and Settings\your_username\My Documents in Windows XP or  
C:\Users\your_username\My Documents in Windows Vista.  
For your device to receive Bluetooth beams, tap Start > Settings > Connections  
tab > Beam and make sure the Receive all incoming beams check box is selected.  
Bluetooth 185  
9.5 Printing Files via Bluetooth  
Connect your device to a Bluetooth printer to print contact information,  
appointment details, images, and other file types.  
Note  
You can print files in the .txt, .jpg, .xhtml, .vcf, .vcs file formats.  
Before you start printing, make sure to turn on the Bluetooth printer and to turn  
on Bluetooth on your device. To turn on Bluetooth, tap Start > Programs > Comm  
Manager, then tap the Bluetooth button.  
To print contact information  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the People tab and then tap All People.  
2. Select the contact whose information you want to print.  
3. Tap Menu > Print via Bluetooth > Menu > Search Devices. Your device  
starts to search for Bluetooth devices.  
4. Select the Bluetooth printer and tap Menu > Send File.  
5. Set the printing options you want, then tap Print.  
To print a calendar appointment  
1. Tap Start > Calendar, then select (highlight) the appointment whose details  
you want to print.  
2. Follow steps ꢁ to 5 in the “To print contact informationprocedure.  
To print a JPEG file  
1. In Pictures & Videos, locate the JPEG file you want to print.  
2. Tap and hold the JPEG image file and then on the menu, tap Print via  
Bluetooth.  
3. Follow steps ꢁ to 5 in the “To print contact informationprocedure.  
 
18ꢂ Bluetooth  
To print a text file  
1. In File Explorer, locate the text file you want to print.  
2. Tap and hold the txt file and then on the menu, tap Print via Bluetooth.  
3. Follow steps ꢁ to 5 in the “To print contact informationprocedure.  
188 Navigating on the Road  
10.1 Google™ Maps (Available by Country)  
Google™ Maps lets you track your current location, view real-time traffic situations,  
and receive detailed directions to your destination. It also allows you to search and  
locate places of interest or even a contact address.  
Note  
You need an active data connection or Wi-Fi connection to use Google Maps.  
Open Google Maps  
Tap Start > Programs > Google Maps.  
Note  
The first time you open Google Maps, you will be asked to accept the terms and  
conditions when using Google Maps. You must agree to the terms and conditions  
before you can proceed.  
Your current location.  
Tap to zoom in  
on the map.  
Tap to open a menu where  
you can set Google Maps to  
find and display your current  
location, get directions, see  
traffic information, look up a  
contact address, and more.  
Tap to zoom  
out on the map.  
Tap to search for places of  
interest and addresses.  
Notes  
Currently, traffic information is only available for the U.S.  
Tap Menu > Options > Reset Google Maps to reset the Google Map cookies,  
history of search terms, preferences, and image cache.  
Tap Menu > Help > Tips to learn more about the program and its many features.  
 
Navigating on the Road 189  
Search for a place of interest  
You can search and locate a place of interest using Google Maps. Google Maps also  
shows the contact information and gives directions on how to get to the place of  
interest from your current location.  
Note  
You can also enter keywords, street addresses, or postal codes when searching places  
using Google Maps.  
1. On the Google Maps screen, tap Search.  
2. Enter the place of interest you want to find, and then tap OK.  
3. Search results will then be listed. Tap the desired place from the list to view its  
address, phone number, and other details.  
190 Navigating on the Road  
4. On the Address tab, you can:  
Tap the [phone number] to call the place of interest that you have  
selected.  
Tap the web address to go to the web site of the place of interest.  
Note  
This information only appears when the web site of the place of interest is  
available.  
Tap Directions to here or to get directions on how to get to the place of  
interest from your current location, or tap Directions from here to get  
directions on how to get to another location from the place of interest.  
Tap Save as contact to save the contact information of the place of  
interest to your contacts list.  
Tap Save as favourite to add the place of interest to your list of favorite  
places. To access your favorite places, tap Menu on the Google Maps  
screen, then tap Favourites.  
Tap Send as text message to send the contact information to a contact  
saved on your device via SMS.  
Tap Search nearby to search for other places of interest near your current  
location.  
For more information about Google Maps, go to  
http://www.google.com/gmm/index.html.  
 
Navigating on the Road 191  
10.2 Guidelines and Preparation for Using GPS  
If you install a GPS software on your device, please follow these guidelines before  
and when using your device as a GPS device.  
Do not operate the GPS system while driving. The plotted GPS route is only  
for driving reference. It should not interfere with actual driving behavior.  
Do not leave your device in a vehicle or expose the device to direct sunlight  
to avoid overheating the battery, which could pose damage to the device or  
risk to the vehicle.  
When using the device inside a vehicle, use the car holder to mount the  
device securely in place. Avoid placing the device in the areas shown in the  
following diagram:  
1
2
3
Do not place where it will block the driver’s vision.  
Do not place where air bags could deploy.  
Do not place anywhere in the vehicle without securing the device in the  
holder.  
19ꢀ Navigating on the Road  
Please use the GPS system cautiously. Users shall be liable for any damages  
resulting from negligent operation of the system.  
The GPS signal cannot pass through solid non-transparent objects. Signal  
reception may be affected by obstructions such as high-rise buildings,  
tunnels, bridges, forests, weather (rainy or cloudy days), etc. If the vehicle’s  
visor contains metal, it will be difficult for the GPS signal to pass through.  
Wireless communication products (such as mobile phones or radar-detecting  
devices) may interfere with the satellite signal, resulting in unstable signal  
reception.  
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is built and operated by the US  
Defense Department. The Department is responsible for the accuracy and  
maintenance of the system. Any changes that the Department makes may  
affect the accuracy and function of the GPS system.  
10.3 Downloading Satellite Data via QuickGPS  
Before you start using your device for GPS navigation, open the QuickGPS program  
first to download ephemeris data (current satellite position and timing information)  
onto your device. This data is needed to determine the GPS position of your current  
location.  
QuickGPS downloads ephemeris data from a web server, instead of from the  
satellites, using the Internet connection on your device, which can be via Wi-Fi,  
ActiveSync or GPRS/ꢁG. This significantly speeds up the time for determining your  
GPS position.  
To open QuickGPS  
Tap Start > Programs > QuickGPS.  
 
Navigating on the Road 19ꢁ  
To download data  
Tap Download on the QuickGPS screen.  
On the screen, initially, you will see the Valid  
time of the downloaded data. As time passes,  
the remaining days and hours of validity will be  
shown.  
To speed up GPS positioning, download the  
latest ephemeris data when the validity of the  
data expires.  
Download options  
To configure download times, tap Menu > Options and choose from the available  
options:  
Remind me when data expires.  
Enables your device to display a reminder message when the validity of the  
ephemeris data has expired.  
When you see the reminder message, tap Menu to dismiss the reminder or to  
set the snooze time so that you will be reminded again. Tap OK to open the  
QuickGPS program and download the latest data.  
Auto download when data expires.  
Allows ephemeris data to be automatically updated onto your device when  
the data has expired.  
194 Navigating on the Road  
Auto download when connected to PC via ActiveSync.  
Allows ephemeris data to be automatically downloaded via ActiveSync to  
your device when your device is connected to your computer. Your computer  
must be connected to the Internet in order to download data.  
Note The ephemeris data is stored on HTC web servers. QuickGPS is preconfigured to  
connect to these servers.  
19ꢂ Experiencing Multimedia  
11.1 Taking Photos and Videos  
Use Camera to take photos and record video clips. You can either use the main  
(back) camera or second (front) camera to take photos or shoot videos.  
To open the Camera screen  
On the Home screen, slide to the Photos and Videos tab and then tap the camera  
icon (  
). The screen orientation automatically switches to landscape mode when  
you open Camera.  
Tip  
You can also tap Start > Programs > Camera to open the Camera program.  
To exit the Camera  
Tap the On-screen control button (  
Camera screen.  
), then tap the Exit icon (  
) on the  
Capture modes  
The camera on your device allows you to capture pictures and video clips by using  
various built-in modes that provide you flexibility in taking your shots.  
To change the capture mode  
Tap the middle icon at the bottom of  
the screen (the icon displayed is based  
on the current capture mode).  
On the on-screen menu, tap the  
capture mode you want to use.  
Current capture mode  
 
Experiencing Multimedia 19ꢃ  
You can select from the following capture modes:  
Icon  
Capture Mode  
Photo Captures standard still images.  
Video Captures video clips, with or without accompanying audio.  
Panorama Captures a sequence of still images continuously in one  
direction, and allows stitching of all the images to create a panoramic  
view of a scenery.  
MMS Video Captures video clips suitable for sending with MMS  
messages.  
Contacts Picture Captures a still image and gives you the option to  
immediately assign it as a Photo ID for a contact.  
Picture Theme Captures still images and places them within frames.  
Note  
When using the second camera to capture, you can use all modes, except for  
Panorama.  
Supported file formats  
Using the available capture modes, the camera in your device captures files in the  
following formats:  
Capture mode  
Format  
Photo / Contacts Picture /  
Picture Theme / Panorama  
JPEG  
Video / MMS Video  
H.ꢀꢂꢁ (.ꢁgp) ; MPEG-4 (.mp4)  
198 Experiencing Multimedia  
Focus  
With just a touch, you can use the camera’s automatic or Touch Focus feature to  
capture sharp and crisp photos and videos of your subjects.  
Note  
Auto-focus and Touch Focus are not supported when using the second camera.  
Auto-focus  
Depending on the Shoot Option you have chosen, you will need to either touch or  
touch and hold the Virtual Camera button (  
) at the right side of the screen  
to activate auto-focus. Auto-focus sets the focus on the object at the center of the  
screen. When auto-focus is activated, it is indicated by a flashing white bracket  
(
). When focus is set, the bracket changes to a steady green bracket (  
).  
Auto-focus is available for all capture modes.  
Note  
For more information about Shoot Option, see “Advanced optionsin this chapter.  
Touch Focus  
Touch Focus allows you to focus on a particular area of the screen. Touch Focus is  
enabled by default and is only available for Photo or Contacts Picture mode.  
To disable it, see “Advanced optionsin this chapter.  
To use Touch Focus:  
1. Set the Camera to Photo or Contacts Picture mode.  
2. Touch an area of the screen that you want to focus. The Touch Focus indicator  
(
) positions itself on the selected area.  
Note If you tap outside the effective focus area, a white box appears to indicate the  
area where you can use Touch Focus.  
3. Depending on the Shoot Option you have chosen, either touch or touch and  
hold  
to activate auto-focus on the selected area. See “Auto-focusin this  
chapter for more information.  
Tip  
To move the Touch Focus indicator back to the center of the screen, tap  
Experiencing Multimedia 199  
Capture a photo or record a video  
By default, the Camera automatically takes the shot or starts capturing video after  
you have set the focus.  
In Photo or Contacts Picture mode, touch the Virtual Camera button to  
activate auto-focus; when focus is set, the Camera automatically takes the shot.  
In Video or MMS Video mode, touch the Virtual Camera button to activate  
auto-focus; when focus is set, the Camera automatically starts recording.  
Touch the Virtual camera button again to stop recording.  
In Picture Theme or Panorama mode, touch the Virtual Camera button to  
activate auto-focus; when focus is set, the Camera automatically takes the  
first shot. Do the same for each shot you need to take.  
The Review screen  
After capturing, the Review screen lets you view, send, or delete the photo or video  
clip by tapping an icon in the side bar.  
Review screen icons  
Icon  
Function  
Back Return to the live Camera screen.  
ꢀ00 Experiencing Multimedia  
Icon  
Function  
View View the captured image or video in the Album program.  
Delete Delete the captured image or video.  
Send Send the captured image or video via MMS or e-mail. .  
Play After capturing a video, tap this icon to play back the video  
in Album. See“Viewing Photos and Videos Using Albumin this  
chapter.  
Assign to Contact After capturing in Contacts Picture mode, tap  
this icon to assign the photo to a selected contact.  
On-screen controls and indicators  
Tap  
to display the on-screen controls and indicators.  
When capturing in Photo, Panorama,  
or Contacts Picture mode  
When capturing in Video or  
MMS Video mode  
1
2
3
4
10  
9
5
6
7
8
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ01  
1
2
3
Zoom control. Tap  
hold these onscreen buttons to gradually zoom in or out on your object.  
Note This control appears only when zooming is supported by the Resolution you  
to zoom in, or  
to zoom out. You can also tap and  
have selected. See “Zoomingfor details.  
Touch Focus / Auto-focus indicator. Tap an area on the screen to move  
the Touch Focus indicator (  
flashing bracket ( ) when focusing. When focus is set, the flashing bracket  
changes to a steady green bracket ( ).  
). When using auto-focus, this area displays a  
Remaining information indicator. In Photo, Contacts Picture, Picture Theme,  
and Panorama modes, this shows the remaining/available shots of pictures  
based on the current settings.  
In Video or MMS Video mode, this shows the remaining duration that can be  
recorded. While recording video, this shows the recorded duration.  
4
5
Exit. Tap to exit the Camera program.  
Album. Tap to open Album. See “Viewing Photos and Videos Using Albumfor  
details.  
6
Capture mode. Displays the current capture mode. Tap to open an on-screen  
menu where you can choose the capture mode.  
7
8
Menu. Tap to open the Menu Panel. See “Menu Panelfor details.  
On-screen control button. Tap to display or hide the on-screen controls and  
indicators. When using Touch Focus, tap this button to move the Touch Focus  
indicator (  
) back to the center of the screen.  
9
Virtual Camera button. This on-screen button activates auto-focus and  
functions as the shutter release button.  
10 Recording indicator. Flashes when recording a video.  
ꢀ0ꢀ Experiencing Multimedia  
11 Template Selector icon. In Picture  
Picture Theme mode  
Theme mode, tap to toggle among  
different templates.  
12 Progress indicator. In Picture  
Theme and Panorama modes, this  
shows the number of consecutive  
shots.  
11 12  
Menu Panel  
The Menu panel provides a quick way of adjusting most common camera settings  
and lets you access more advanced camera settings. On the Camera screen, tap  
to open the Menu panel. To adjust a setting, keep tapping a button on the panel, for  
instance, Resolution, to cycle through the available settings. To access advanced  
options, tap  
.
Note  
The available settings on the panel depend on the selected capture mode.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ0ꢁ  
1
2
Resolution. Select the resolution to use when taking photos or capturing videos.  
Refer to the resolution table in this chapter.  
White Balance. White balance enables the camera to capture colors more  
accurately by adjusting to different lighting conditions. White balance  
settings include: Auto (  
and Fluorescent ( ).  
Brightness. Tap to open the Brightness bar at the bottom of the screen. On  
the Brightness bar, tap to increase, or tap to decrease the brightness  
), Daylight (  
), Night (  
), Incandescent (  
),  
3
level. Tap outside the Brightness bar to apply the change.  
4
5
Camera. Tap to select the camera to use. You can choose from main camera  
(
), second camera (  
), and second camera flip (  
).  
Self-timer. Tap to set the self-timer to 2 seconds, 10 seconds, or Off when  
in the Photo or Contacts Picture mode. When you press the Virtual Camera  
button to capture a still image, it starts to count down, then captures a still  
image after the time expires.  
6
Advanced. Tap to open the advanced camera settings. See “Advanced  
optionsfor details.  
Zooming  
Before capturing a photo or a video clip, you can zoom in to make the object in  
focus move closer, or zoom out to make the object move farther away.  
To zoom in or out  
Tap  
to zoom in, or  
to zoom out. You can also tap and hold these on-screen  
buttons to gradually zoom in or out on your object.  
The camera zoom range for a photo or a video clip depends on the capture mode  
and resolution. Refer to the table for more information.  
ꢀ04 Experiencing Multimedia  
Capture mode  
Resolution  
Zoom range  
Normal:  
ꢀ59ꢀ x 1944  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
5M  
Widescreen: ꢀ59ꢀ x 155ꢀ  
Normal: ꢀ048 x 15ꢁꢂ  
Widescreen: ꢀ048 x 1ꢀ1ꢂ  
Normal: 1ꢂ00 x 1ꢀ00  
Widescreen: 1ꢂ00 x 9ꢂ0  
Normal: 1ꢀ80 x 9ꢂ0  
Widescreen: 1ꢀ80 x ꢃꢂ8  
Normal: ꢂ40 x 480  
Widescreen: ꢂ40 x ꢁ84  
Normal: ꢁꢀ0 x ꢀ40  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to ꢁ.ꢀx  
ꢁM  
ꢀM  
Photo  
1M  
Large  
Medium  
Widescreen: ꢁꢀ0 x 19ꢀ  
ꢁ5ꢀ x ꢀ88  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to 1.ꢂx  
1.0x to ꢁ.ꢀx  
CIF  
ꢁꢀ0 x ꢀ40  
1ꢃꢂ x 144  
1ꢀ8 x 9ꢂ  
Large  
Video  
Medium  
Small  
1ꢃꢂ x 144  
1ꢀ8 x 9ꢂ  
Medium  
Small  
MMS Video  
Panorama  
ꢂ40 x 480  
ꢁꢀ0 x ꢀ40  
Large  
Medium  
Contacts  
Picture  
ꢀ40 x ꢁꢀ0  
1.0x to ꢁ.ꢀx  
Medium  
Depends on the  
size of the selected  
template  
Picture Theme  
Note  
Determined by the current template  
The capture size settings and zoom ranges are only for the main camera.  
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ05  
Advanced options  
The Advanced options let you adjust options for your selected capture mode  
and set Camera program preferences. Access the Advanced options by tapping  
Advanced on the Menu Panel. You can tap on-screen to navigate through the  
Advanced options screen.  
Tap an item to  
change the setting.  
Tap to go back to the  
Camera screen.  
Tap to go through the different  
Advanced option screens.  
Widescreen (Photo mode). When set to On (default), you can use the entire  
screen to frame your subject. When Off, a side bar appears on the right side  
of the Camera screen and holds the Virtual Camera and On-screen control  
buttons. Refer to the Zoom table for the resolution when Widescreen is On.  
Touch Focus (Photo and Contacts Picture modes). Enables or disables the  
Touch Focus function. Touch Focus is On by default.  
Review Duration. Set a time length for displaying the captured image/video  
on the Review screen. Select No Limit if you do not want to impose a time  
limit. Select No Review to immediately return to the live Camera screen after  
capturing and saving.  
Quality. Select the JPEG image quality level for all captured still images.  
Choose from Basic, Normal, Fine, and Super Fine.  
ꢀ0ꢂ Experiencing Multimedia  
Capture Format. Available only when in Video/MMS Video mode, tap this  
option to select the desired file format for captured videos.  
Time Stamp (Photo mode). Choose whether or not to include the shooting  
date and time on captured photos.  
Storage. Select where you want to save your files. You can either save the files  
to the main memory or to a storage card, if one is installed.  
Keep Backlight. Turn the backlight on or off. This overrides your device  
backlight settings while you are using the camera.  
Shutter Sound. Choose whether or not you want the camera to make a  
shutter sound when you press the Virtual Camera button.  
Shoot Option. The camera comes with an auto-focus feature that is activated  
when the Virtual Camera button is either touched or touched and held.  
Touch and Hold. Requires you to touch and hold the Virtual Camera  
button to activate auto-focus. When focus is set, keep touching the button  
to take the shot or start recording video. Otherwise, lift your finger from  
the Virtual Camera button to cancel.  
Touch (Default). Requires you to touch the Virtual Camera button to  
activate the auto-focus. When focus is set, the Camera automatically takes  
the shot or starts capturing video.  
Image Properties. This option lets you adjust the capture properties, such as  
Contrast, Saturation, and Sharpness.  
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ0ꢃ  
1
2
3
4
Tap a property to adjust.  
Tap to save the settings.  
Tap to decrease the value.  
1
Tap to reset all properties to their  
default values.  
5
6
Tap to increase the value.  
Tap to close the submenu without  
applying and saving the changes.  
2
3
4
5
6
Effect. Choose a special effect such as Grayscale, Sepia, or Negative, to  
apply to your photos or video clips.  
Metering Mode. Select a metering mode to allow the camera to measure the  
amount of light and calculate the best-fit exposure value before capturing.  
Choose either Center Area to measure light using the center area of the  
subject, or Average to measure light using the area around the subject.  
Prefix. When Default is selected as the prefix, the file name of each new  
captured file is set to “IMAGEor “VIDEOfollowed by a sequential number, for  
example: IMAGE_001.jpg. You may also choose to name files using either the  
current Date or Date & Time as the prefix.  
Note If you set the Camera to save captured photos to a storage card, the prefix  
cannot be selected. Captured photos will be named using the convention  
IMAGE_nnn.jpg (where ‘nnnis the counter) which is the DCIM (Digital Camera  
Images) naming standard, and will be saved to the \DCIM\100MEDIA folder on  
the storage card.  
Counter. To reset the file naming counter back to 1, tap Reset.  
Flicker Adjustment. When taking indoor shots, flicker on the camera screen  
may be caused by inconsistencies between the vertical scan rate of the camera  
display and the flicker frequency of fluorescent lighting. To reduce flicker, you  
can change the flicker adjustment setting to Auto or to the proper frequency  
(50Hz or 60Hz) of the power in the country where your device is being used.  
ꢀ08 Experiencing Multimedia  
Grid (Photo mode). Choose  
whether or not to show a grid on  
the Camera screen. Showing a grid  
helps you frame and center your  
subject easily and accurately.  
Record with Audio (Video or MMS  
Video mode). Select On to record  
audio with the captured video  
clips, or select Off to capture video  
without audio.  
Recording Limit (Video mode). Set the maximum duration or file size for  
recording video.  
Grid marks  
Template (Picture Theme mode). Select a template.  
Template Folder (Picture Theme mode). By default, templates are stored  
in the \My Documents\Templates folder on the device’s Main Memory. If  
you transferred some templates to a storage card (via File Explorer), set this  
option to Main + Card to specify that templates are located in both the main  
memory and the storage card.  
Show Reminder (Contacts Picture mode). Select On if you want the Camera  
to always display a message that confirms whether or not to assign the  
captured picture to a contact.  
Direction (Panorama mode). Choose in what direction images will be  
stitched in a panorama.  
Stitch Count (Panorama mode). Select the desired number of snapshots to  
be taken and stitched into a panorama.  
Help. Tap to open the Camera program help file.  
About. Tap to display version and copyright information.  
 
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ09  
11.2 Viewing Photos and Videos Using Album  
Use Album to view images and videos in your device. Album offers a host of  
features that let you zoom on your photos, view your images as a slideshow, use  
images as contact pictures, and more.  
Note  
Album can only display files in the BMP, GIF, PNG, JPG, Animated GIF, GP, MP4, and  
WMV formats.  
To open Album  
Do one of the following:  
On the Home screen, slide to the  
Photos and Videos tab and tap  
Album.  
Tap to  
open the  
Camera  
program.  
In the Camera program, tap  
.
Tap Start > Programs > Album.  
Note  
When you open Album from the  
Camera program, the screen orientation  
of Album is switched to landscape  
mode.  
Select a photo or video to view  
1. On the main Album screen, tap Albums and then select the album to view.  
The contents of the album are then displayed on the main Album screen.  
2. Browse through the files by sliding your finger upward or downward.  
3. Do one of the following:  
Tap an image to view it in full screen mode. SeeView an imagefor details.  
ꢀ10 Experiencing Multimedia  
Tap a video file (files with the  
back videoin this chapter for details.  
icon) to play back the video file. See “Play  
Select a still image and then tap Menu > Slideshow to view the images in  
the album as a slideshow. Animated GIF and video files will not be played  
back in the slideshow. See “To view still images as a slideshowin this  
chapter for details.  
View an image  
While viewing an image in full screen, tap the screen to open the on-screen menu.  
Tap to send the  
image using one  
Tap to open a menu  
of the Messaging  
where you can save the  
accounts.  
screen image as a photo  
for a contact, save the  
current image as a new  
file, delete the image, and  
view file properties.  
Tap to start the  
slideshow.  
Tap to go back to  
the main Album  
screen, Photos  
and Videos tab, or  
Camera.  
Tip  
You can delete multiple files at once by selecting Menu > Delete Items on the main  
Album screen and then selecting the files to delete.  
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ11  
To rotate the image  
While viewing images, you can automatically rotate the image by simply turning  
your device sideways.  
To view the next or previous image  
When viewing images in Portrait or Landscape mode, go to the next image by  
swiping your finger across the screen from right to left. Go back to the previous  
image by swiping your finger from left to right.  
ꢀ1ꢀ Experiencing Multimedia  
To zoom in or out of an image  
While viewing an image, make a full circle motion on the screen with your finger.  
Slide your finger clockwise  
on an area to zoom in on  
that area.  
Slide your finger counter-  
clockwise to zoom out.  
Tips  
When you zoom in on an image, double tap the screen to automatically zoom out  
and fit the image to the screen.  
When you zoom in on an image, tap and hold the screen so you can pan the  
image.  
When you zoom in on an image, tap the screen to open the on-screen menu.  
On the on-screen menu, tap  
image on-screen as a new file.  
and then select Save Screen Image to save the  
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ1ꢁ  
To view still images as a slideshow  
While viewing the slideshow, tap the screen to show playback controls.  
Note  
The screen orientation automatically switches to landscape mode when viewing a  
slideshow.  
Tap to open the slideshow  
options where you can  
set the transition effect  
to use, time per slide, and  
orientation of the images.  
Tap to return to the  
main Album screen  
or the Photos and  
Videos tab.  
Tap to go back to  
the previous image.  
Tap to go to the next image.  
Tap to play or pause the  
slideshow playback.  
Tip  
If the images are in your favorite album, you can start the slideshow from the Photos  
and Videos tab on the Home screen. On the Photos and Video tab, tap Slideshow.  
214 Experiencing Multimedia  
Play back video  
While playing back video, tap the screen to show the playback controls.  
Drag to go forward  
or backward in the  
video.  
Total duration  
Elapsed time  
Tap to go back to  
the beginning of  
the video.  
Tap to stop  
video playback.  
Tap to play or pause  
video playback.  
Tip  
If the video is in your favorite album, you can start the video playback from the  
Photos and Videos tab on the Home screen. On the Photos and Video tab, tap Play.  
Close Album  
Close Album by tapping  
on the main Album screen. When viewing files in full  
screen mode, tap the screen to show the on-screen menu or playback controls and  
then tap to go back to the main Album screen.  
 
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ15  
11.3 Using Windows Media® Player Mobile  
Windows Media® Player Mobile plays digital audio and video files that are stored  
on your device or on a network, such as on a web site.  
Video File Formats Supported  
File Extensions  
Windows Media Video  
MPEG4 Simple Profile  
H.ꢀꢂꢁ  
.wmv, .asf  
.mp4  
.ꢁgp, .ꢁgꢀ  
.mp4, .ꢁgp, .ꢁgꢀ, .m4v  
.avi  
H.ꢀꢂ4  
Motion JPEG  
Audio File Formats Supported  
File Extensions  
Windows Media Audio  
WAVE  
MPꢁ  
.wma  
.wav  
.mpꢁ  
MIDI and SP MIDI  
AMR Narrow Band  
AMR Wide Band  
AAC, AAC+, and eAAC+  
MPEG4 audio  
QCELP  
.mid, .midi, .rmi  
.amr, .ꢁgp  
.awb, .ꢁgp  
.aac, .mp4, .m4a, .ꢁgp  
.m4a  
.qcp, .ꢁgꢀ  
.qcp  
EVRC  
To open Windows Media® Player Mobile  
Tap Start > Programs > Windows Media.  
ꢀ1ꢂ Experiencing Multimedia  
About the controls  
Tap and drag to  
jump to any part of  
the video or audio  
Mute/Unmute  
Full screen  
Increase volume  
Decrease volume  
Visit WindowsMedia.com  
Skip to the beginning of  
the current file or to the  
previous file  
Skip to the next file  
Play/Pause  
About the screens and menus  
Windows Media® Player Mobile has three primary screens:  
Playback screen. The screen that displays the playback controls (such as Play,  
Pause, Next, Previous, and Volume) and the video window. You can change  
the appearance of this screen by choosing a different skin.  
Now Playing screen. The screen that displays the Now Playing playlist. This  
special playlist indicates the current file being played and any files that are  
“queued upto play next.  
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ1ꢃ  
Library screen. The screen that lets you quickly find your audio files, video  
files, and playlists. It contains categories such as My Music, My Videos, My TV,  
and My Playlists.  
At the bottom of each screen, you can open a Menu. The commands on this menu  
vary, depending on which screen you are viewing. For more information about the  
commands in these menus, see Help on your device.  
Synchronize video and audio files  
Use the latest version of Windows Media® Player on your computer to synchronize  
digital media files from your computer to your device. This ensures that protected  
files and album art (for skins) are copied to your device correctly.  
To synchronize content to your device automatically  
1. On your computer, open Windows Media® Player, then connect your device to  
your computer.  
2. In the Device Setup Wizard, select Yes, search my computer now.  
Note If you have previously opened Windows Media® Player and searched for media  
on your computer, you will not be prompted to search your computer in Step ꢀ.  
3. On the Device Setup dialog box, enter a name for your device and click  
Finish.  
Note If you installed a storage card that has a capacity of more than 4GB and  
your entire library can fit into the storage card, Windows Media Player will  
automatically synchronize your music files. The device also needs to be set to  
Disk Drive mode for Windows Media Player to automatically synchronize.  
4. On the left panel of Windows Media® Player, right-click the name of your  
device and click Set Up Sync.  
Note To set up media synchronization on a storage card, right-click Storage Card in the  
left panel of Windows Media® Player, then click Set Up Sync.  
5. Select the playlist(s) that you want to sync between your computer and  
device, then click Add.  
ꢀ18 Experiencing Multimedia  
Note On the Device Setup dialog box, make sure that the Sync this device  
automatically check box is selected.  
6. Click Finish.  
The files will begin synchronizing to your device. The next time you connect your  
device to your computer while Windows Media® Player is running, synchronization  
will start automatically.  
To synchronize content manually to your device  
1. If you have not set up media synchronization between your device and  
computer, follow steps 1 to ꢁ in “To synchronize content to your device  
automatically.  
2. Click the Sync tab on the Windows Media® Player of your computer. Select a  
Playlist or a Library on the left panel of the Windows Media® Player.  
3. From the Content List, drag the media files that you want to sync to your  
device and drop them to the Sync List.  
Playlists and Library List  
Content List  
Sync List  
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀ19  
4. Click Start Sync to start synchronizing the selected files to your device.  
Notes  
Use Windows Media® Player 11 or higher on your computer to synchronize media  
files to your device.  
Audio files copy faster if Windows Media® Player is configured to automatically set  
the quality level for audio files copied to your device. For more information, see the  
Windows Media® Player Help.  
Play media  
Use the Library to find and play songs, videos, and playlists that are stored on your  
device or an installed storage card.  
To update the Library  
1. If you are not on the Library screen, tap Menu > Library.  
2. On the Library screen, tap the Library arrow (near the top of the screen), then  
tap the media storage that you want use, for example, Storage Card.  
3. In most cases, Windows Media® Player Mobile automatically updates the  
library. However, you can manually update the library to ensure that it  
contains new files that you recently copied to your device or storage card.  
Tap Menu > Update Library to manually update the library list.  
To play video and audio files on your device  
1. Select a category (for example, My Music or My Playlists).  
2. Tap and hold the item that you want to play (such as a song, album, or artist  
name), then tap Play.  
Tips  
To play a media file that is stored on your device but is not in a library, on the  
Library screen, tap Menu > Open File. Tap and hold the item that you want to play  
(such as a file or a folder), then tap Play.  
To play a media file from the Internet or a network server, tap Menu > Library then  
tap Menu > Open URL.  
ꢀꢀ0 Experiencing Multimedia  
Playlists  
In Windows Media® Player Mobile, you can create a new playlist by saving the  
current Now Playing playlist and giving it a new name.  
To save a new playlist  
1. If you are not on the Library screen, tap Menu > Library.  
2. Tap to select a category (for example, My Music or My Playlists).  
3. Select a media file that you want, then tap Menu > Queue Up. This adds the  
file to the Now Playing list.  
Repeat this step until you have added all desired media files to the Now  
Playing list.  
Note You cannot select multiple files simultaneously.  
4. After adding the media files, tap Menu > Now Playing.  
5. On the Now Playing screen, tap Menu > Save Playlist.  
6. Enter the playlist name, then tap Done.  
7. To play back the playlist you created, tap My Playlists in the Library, select  
your playlist, then tap Play.  
Troubleshooting  
If you encounter a problem while using the Windows Media® Player Mobile, a  
number of resources are available to help you troubleshoot the issue.  
For more information, see the Troubleshooting Windows Media® Player  
Mobile page at the Microsoft web site (http://www.microsoft.com/windows/  
windowsmedia/player/windowsmobile/troubleshooting.aspx).  
 
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀꢀ1  
11.4 Using FM Radio  
FM Radio allows you to listen to FM radio stations on your device. Since FM Radio  
uses the provided stereo wired headset as an antenna, you must plug in the  
headset first onto the earphone jack of your device before you open the program.  
To open FM Radio  
Tap Start > Programs > FM Radio.  
The first time this program is used, it will automatically scan for available FM  
channels in your area, save them as presets, then play the first FM station found. For  
information about saving favorite stations as presets, see “Save presets.“  
When you tap  
on the FM Radio screen, the program continues to run in the  
background and allows you to continue listening to the radio while you use other  
programs. To turn off the FM radio, tap  
Radio screen.  
on the upper right corner of the FM  
FM Radio controls  
Function  
Turns off FM radio.  
1
2
1
2
3
4
See “Radio displayfor details.  
Searches the FM band for the next higher FM channel.  
Increases the radio frequency by 0.1MHz.  
Turns the sound on or off.  
Save up to six favorite FM stations as presets.  
Tap a button to tune in to a favorite station.  
5
6
10  
9
3
4
8
7
7
8
9
Switches between headset and speaker output.  
Switches between Mono and Stereo modes.  
Decreases the radio frequency by 0.1MHz.  
5
6
10 Searches the FM band for the next lower FM channel.  
ꢀꢀꢀ Experiencing Multimedia  
Tip  
Tap Menu to choose more options for FM Radio, such as Scan & Save to perform a  
rescan of the FM band for available FM stations and save them as presets, and more.  
Radio display  
1
2
1
2
Shows the status of FM Radio.  
Shows the preset number when you select a  
preset FM station.  
3
4
Shows the received signal strength.  
Shows the radio frequency.  
3
4
Adjust the volume  
Press the VOLUME UP and VOLUME DOWN buttons on the side of the device to  
adjust the FM Radio volume.  
Save presets  
Presets are favorite FM stations that you can save for easy access. You can save up to  
six FM stations to the preset buttons on the main FM Radio screen, or save up to ꢀ0  
presets on the Presets screen.  
To save FM stations  
1. Tune in to the desired FM frequency, then tap Presets.  
2. On the Presets screen, tap  
that appears on the desired preset number  
where you want to save the FM station.  
You can save up to ꢀ0 preset radio stations. Radio stations that are saved on  
Presets 1 to ꢂ can be accessed on the main FM Radio screen.  
Tip  
Tap  
to remove a favorite FM station from the list.  
3. When done, tap OK.  
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀꢀꢁ  
To listen to a preset FM station  
Do one of the following:  
On the main FM Radio screen, tap the preset button that shows your favorite  
station.  
On the Preset screen, select a preset number that shows your favorite station,  
then tap Listen.  
FM Radio main menu  
Tap Menu on the FM Radio screen to access options for the FM Radio program.  
Scan & Save Automatically scan radio stations that can be picked up by the  
device and save them as presets. Existing presets will be cleared and replaced  
with the newly scanned radio stations. You can have a maximum of ꢀ0 preset  
radio stations.  
Stereo Toggles between using Stereo or Mono mode when listening to an FM  
radio station.  
Mute Toggles between muting and restoring the volume.  
Output Select whether to use the device Speaker or Wired Headset to listen  
to the radio.  
Sleep Set how much time must pass before FM Radio goes into sleep mode.  
The Sleep option is switched to Off every time you launch FM Radio.  
Exit Select to turn off FM Radio.  
 
ꢀꢀ4 Experiencing Multimedia  
11.5 Using Audio Booster  
Audio Booster optimizes sound for a better listening experience. It provides preset  
moods, such as hip hop, jazz, rock, etc., and several enhancement presets that suit  
different types of music.  
To access Audio Booster  
Tap Start > Programs > Audio Booster.  
Control  
Function  
1
2
3
On  
Select the check box to enable or  
disable the equalizer.  
1
2
5
Frequency  
band  
Drag the sliders to adjust the  
frequency.  
Menu  
Done  
Tap Menu > Cancel to exit Audio  
Booster without applying the  
modified settings.  
Tap Menu > Save as Preset or  
Delete Preset to save or delete  
preset equalizer settings.  
4
5
Tap to apply the modified  
settings.  
Equalizer  
presets  
Tap to choose the Equalizer preset  
to use.  
4
3
To use a Equalizer preset  
Tap the list box then select a desired preset.  
To create a custom equalizer preset  
1. Adjust the frequency bands to your desired values by dragging the equalizer  
controls. The selected values are indicated on top of the sliders.  
2. Save your equalizer settings as a preset by tapping Menu > Save as Preset.  
 
Experiencing Multimedia ꢀꢀ5  
3. Enter a preset name and then tap Done. The preset you created will be added  
to the list box.  
To delete a custom equalizer preset  
1. Tap the list box then select the Equalizer preset you want to delete.  
2. Tap Menu > Delete Preset.  
Note  
You can only delete custom equalizer presets. Equalizer presets that are pre-installed  
cannot be deleted.  
11.6 Using MP3 Trimmer  
Use MP3 Trimmer to trim MPꢁ files. You can choose to save it as a new file or set it  
as a ring tone.  
Title  
Duration  
Start and End Points  
Set the part of the music that  
will be used as the ring tone.  
Drag the left handle to set the  
Playback time  
start time, then drag the right  
handle to set the end time.  
Play/Stop  
Start Point / End Point  
To set the start and end  
points more precisely, you  
can also tap these controls  
to step backward/forward  
one step.  
ꢀꢀꢂ Experiencing Multimedia  
To trim the MP3 file  
1. Tap Start > Programs > MP3 Trimmer.  
2. Tap Open to find the MPꢁ file in the device or storage card.  
3. On the MPꢁ Trimmer screen, use the stylus to adjust the Start Point and  
End Point.  
After you set the Start Point, the song will play back starting from the start  
point.  
After you set the End Point, the song will play back starting from 5 seconds  
before the end point.  
4. Tap Play to play back the trimmed song.  
5. Tap Menu and select to whether set the file as the default ring tone, save the  
file to the ring tone folder, or save it using another file name.  
Tip  
If you only want to save the song to the ring tone folder for future use, tap  
Save to Ring Tone Folder. Later on, you can tap Start > Settings >  
Personal tab > Phone to set it as your ring tone.  
ꢀꢀ8 Programs  
12.1 Accessing Programs on Your Device  
You will find preinstalled programs in the Start menu and on the Programs screen  
of your device.  
To launch and use a program  
Do one of the following:  
Tap Start to open the Start menu and then tap a desired program.  
To access more programs, tap Start > Programs, or slide to the Programs tab  
on the Home screen, and then tap All Programs.  
12.2 Adding and Removing Programs  
Additional programs, such as the programs in the Application disc or other  
programs that you purchase, can be installed and uninstalled on your device. Your  
device does not allow you to uninstall most of the preinstalled programs.  
Note  
Before you purchase additional programs for your device, make sure that they are  
compatible with your device.  
To install a program  
1. Download the program to your computer (or insert the CD or disk that  
contains the program into your computer).  
You may see a single *.exe file, a *.zip file, a Setup.exe file, or several versions  
of files for different device types and processors. Be sure to select only the  
programs designed for your device.  
2. Read any installation instructions or documentation that comes with the  
program. Many programs provide special installation instructions.  
3. Connect your device to the computer.  
4. Double-click the installation setup file.  
 
Programs ꢀꢀ9  
To uninstall a program  
1. Tap Start > Settings > System tab > Remove Programs.  
2. In the Programs in storage memory list, select the program you want to  
remove, then tap Remove.  
12.3 Adobe® Reader® LE  
Adobe® Reader® LE is an application for viewing PDF (Portable Document Format)  
documents on your device. It supports a subset of the features found in the PC  
versions of Adobe Reader.  
To open Adobe Reader LE  
Tap Start > Programs > Adobe Reader LE.  
To open a PDF file on your device  
Open a PDF file in Adobe Reader LE; or  
Open File Explorer, find the PDF file, then tap the file to open it.  
To navigate through a PDF document  
You can use the controls in the program and finger gestures to navigate a PDF  
document.  
Tap Tools > View > Continuous and then slide your finger up or down the  
screen to scroll through the pages in the document.  
Tip  
You can also drag the scroll bars to scroll through the pages.  
Tap to zoom in or  
the screen to pan the current page.  
to zoom out. After zooming in, slide your finger on  
Tap to return to the previous page; tap to move to the next page. Tap  
to jump to the first page; tap to jump to the last page.  
Tap Tools > Go To > Page Number to enter a page number that you want to  
view.  
 
ꢀꢁ0 Programs  
To search for text in the document  
1. Tap Tools > Find > Text or tap in the toolbar.  
2. Type in the text to be searched, then tap Find.  
The matched text in the document will be highlighted.  
3. To view the next occurrence of the text, tap Tools > Find > Next.  
Tips  
Adobe Reader LE displays a bookmark pane for the PDF files that contain  
bookmarks. Tap the bookmarks to go to a specific section/page within the file.  
Adobe Reader LE supports password-protected PDF files with up to 1ꢀ8-bit  
encryption. When you open a password-protected PDF file, you will be prompted  
to enter the password before opening it.  
12.4 Calendar  
Use Calendar to create appointments, including meetings and other events. You  
can also synchronize Calendar appointments between your device and computer.  
To open the Calendar screen  
On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, tap Calendar or a displayed appointment;  
or  
Tap Start > Calendar.  
Create appointments  
To schedule an appointment  
1. Open the Calendar screen and then tap Menu > New Appointment.  
2. Enter a name for the appointment.  
3. Do one of the following:  
If it is a special occasion such as a birthday or a whole-day event, set the  
All Day option to Yes.  
 
Programs ꢀꢁ1  
If there is a time frame for the appointment, set the start and end dates  
and times.  
4. Specify the type of category for your appointment, so that it can be grouped  
with other related appointments. Tap Categories, then select a preset  
category (Business, Holiday, Personal, or Seasonal), or tap New to create your  
own category.  
5. When finished, tap OK to return to the calendar.  
Notes  
All-day events do not occupy blocks of time in Calendar; instead, they appear in  
banners at the top of the calendar.  
To remove an appointment, tap Menu > Delete Appointment.  
Tip  
To have the time entered automatically in Day view, tap and drag to select a time slot  
for the new appointment, and tap Menu > New Appointment.  
To set the reminder time for new appointments  
By default, Calendar has been set to display a reminder alert when you have new  
upcoming appointments. You can change the reminder time.  
1. Open the Calendar screen.  
2. Tap Menu > Tools > Options > Appointments tab.  
3. Make sure the Set reminders for new items check box is selected.  
4. Set the time when you want the reminder to alert you.  
5. Tap OK to return to the Calendar screen.  
ꢀꢁꢀ Programs  
View appointments  
By default, Calendar displays appointments in Agenda view. You can also look at  
your appointments in Day, Week, Month, and Year views.  
The highlighted hours  
here indicate the time of  
your appointments.  
The arrows  
Tap to view appointment  
details.  
indicate that these  
are conflicting  
appointments.  
Tap to switch views.  
Agenda view  
To see detailed appointment information in any view, tap the appointment.  
To view appointments by category, tap Menu > Filter, then select the desired  
category.  
To change the default view that Calendar uses to display appointments, tap  
Menu > Tools > Options > General tab. Tap the Start in box, then choose  
the calendar view.  
When in Month view, you will see the following indicators:  
Morning appointment  
Afternoon or evening appointment  
Both morning and afternoon/evening appointments  
All-day event  
Programs ꢀꢁꢁ  
Send appointments  
To send a meeting request  
Use Calendar to schedule meetings via e-mail with contacts who use Outlook or  
Outlook Mobile.  
1. Open the Calendar screen.  
2. Schedule a new appointment, or open an existing one and tap Menu > Edit.  
3. Tap Attendees, then tap Add Required Attendee or Add Optional  
Attendee and add the contacts whom you want to invite.  
Note You can specify if an attendee is required or optional only if your device is  
connected to a Microsoft Exchange ꢀ00ꢃ server. Otherwise, all attendees are  
designated as required. For more information, see “Managing Meeting Requests”  
in Chapter ꢃ.  
4. When you have finished adding attendees, tap Done.  
5. Tap OK to send.  
Tip  
To choose the e-mail account to use for sending meeting requests, tap Menu > Tools  
> Options > Appointments tab. Tap the Send meeting requests via box and choose  
to send via your Outlook E-mail, POPꢁ/IMAP4 or Windows Live™ account.  
Notes  
If you’re sending the meeting request using your Outlook E-mail account, it will  
be sent to the attendees the next time you synchronize your device with your  
computer or Exchange Server.  
When attendees accept your meeting request, the meeting is automatically  
added to their schedules. When their response is sent back to you, your calendar is  
updated as well.  
To send appointment details as a vCalendar  
A vCalendar is a standard file format used for exchanging scheduling and task  
information. vCalendar files can be exported to Outlook on the computer.  
After selecting the appointment to send in the Calendar screen, tap Menu >  
Send as vCalendar to send a vCalendar containing appointment details as a file  
attachment in an e-mail message.  
ꢀꢁ4 Programs  
12.5 Contacts  
Contacts is your address book and information storage for people and businesses  
you communicate with. You can add the following types of contacts to your device:  
Outlook contacts. Contacts that are stored on your device, which can be  
created on your device or synchronized with your PC or the Exchange Server.  
SIM contacts. Contacts that are stored on the SIM card. Only a name and  
phone number can be stored for each entry.  
Windows Live™ contacts. Contacts that you communicate with using  
Windows Live™ Messenger or MSN.  
Note You can only add Windows Live™ contacts after you have set up Windows Live™  
on your device. See “Add Windows Live contactsin Chapter 8 for details.  
To open the Contacts screen  
Do one of the following:  
On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen, slide to the People tab and then tap All  
People; or  
Tap Start > Contacts.  
 
Programs ꢀꢁ5  
Add new contacts  
To add a contact on your device  
1. Open the Contacts screen.  
2. Tap New, select Outlook Contact, and enter the  
contact information.  
3. In the File as field, choose how you want the  
contact name to appear in the contact list.  
4. To add a photo of the contact, tap Select a  
picture, and then select the picture file or tap  
Camera to take a photo of the contact.  
5. To assign a ring tone to the contact, tap the  
Ring tone field, scroll through the list of tones,  
then select a desired tone.  
6. When finished, tap OK.  
Tips  
If a person who is not in your list of contacts called you and you want to save that  
person’s phone number, tap and hold the phone number in the Call History and  
then tap Save to Contacts from the shortcut menu.  
To save a phone number that is contained in a message, open the message, tap the  
underlined phone number, and then tap Menu > Save to Contacts.  
To edit contact information, tap the contact name and then tap Menu > Edit.  
To add a contact to your SIM card  
1. Open the Contacts screen.  
2. Tap New, then select SIM Contact.  
3. Enter a contact name and phone number, then tap OK.  
Tip  
You can also use the SIM Manager to add and edit contacts on your SIM card. For  
more information, see "SIM Manager" in this chapter.  
ꢀꢁꢂ Programs  
Organize and search contacts  
To group similar contacts  
For easier management, you can group similar contacts by assigning them to  
categories.  
1. Create a new Outlook contact or edit an existing Outlook contact.  
2. Tap Categories.  
3. Select a preset category such as Business or Personal, or tap New to create  
your own category.  
4. When finished, tap OK.  
To find a contact on your device  
There are several ways to find a contact when your contact list is long:  
Begin entering a contact name in the provided text box until the contact you  
want is displayed.  
On the Quick Scroll bar on the right  
of the Contacts screen, scroll to or  
tap a letter to go directly to the part  
of the contacts list where contact  
names start with that letter.  
Quick  
Scroll  
bar  
Note You can disable the Quick  
Scroll bar by tapping Menu >  
Options and selecting the Show  
alphabetical index check box.  
This will show the alphabetical  
index at the top of the Contacts  
list.  
Programs ꢀꢁꢃ  
Filter the list by categories. In the contact list, tap Menu > Filter, then tap  
a category you’ve assigned to a contact. To show all contacts again, select  
Menu > Filter > All Contacts.  
Share contact information  
To beam a contact’s details  
You can quickly send contact information to another mobile phone or device  
through Bluetooth beaming.  
1. On the Contacts screen, select a contact.  
2. Tap Menu > Send Contact > Beam, then select a device where to beam the  
contact to.  
Note  
Before beaming, make sure Bluetooth is turned on and set to visible mode on your  
device and the target mobile device. You can also beam contact information to your  
computer. See Chapter 9 for details.  
To send contact information via text messaging  
1. On the Contacts screen, select a contact.  
2. Tap Menu > Send Contact > Text Messages.  
3. Select the contact information you want to send, then tap Done.  
4. In the new text message, enter the mobile phone number of the recipient,  
then tap Send.  
ꢀꢁ8 Programs  
12.6 Comm Manager  
Comm Manager is a central location where you can easily turn on and off the  
communication features of your device such as the phone, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, and  
data connection.  
To access the Comm Manager  
Do one of the following:  
On the TouchFLO ꢁD Home screen,  
slide to the Settings tab and then  
touch Communications.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Touch Start > Programs >  
Comm Manager.  
Touch Start > Settings >  
Connections tab > Comm Manager.  
1
Switch Airplane Mode on or off. Turning on Airplane Mode turns off the phone,  
Wi-Fi and Bluetooth functions. For more information, see "To enable or disable  
Airplane Mode" in Chapter ꢀ.  
2
3
4
Switch the phone on or off. Tap Settings > Phone to set the ring tone and other  
phone settings. See Chapter 1ꢁ for details.  
Switch Bluetooth on or off. Tap Settings > Bluetooth to configure Bluetooth on  
your device. See Chapter 9 for details.  
Switch Wi-Fi on or off. Tap Settings > Wireless LAN to configure wireless network  
connection settings. See Chapter 8 for details.  
 
Programs ꢀꢁ9  
5
6
Switch between automatically receiving (as items arrive) or manually retrieving  
Outlook e-mails. See Chapter ꢃ for details.  
Connect or disconnect active data connections (GPRS, for example).  
12.7 JETCET™ PRINT  
JETCET PRINT lets you print image files or documents from your device straight to  
a Bluetooth, or network printer. You can also print e-mails, e-mail attachments, web  
pages, appointments, contacts, and tasks.  
Tip  
For more information about JETCET PRINT, consult the JETCET PRINT help in your  
device by tapping Menu > Help > Contents in the JETCET PRINT screen.  
Open JETCET PRINT  
Tap Start > Programs > JETCET PRINT.  
Tap to set up a  
Tap to select a  
printer or change the  
printer settings.  
document to print.  
Tap to select an  
image to print.  
Tap to select an  
e-mail, e-mail  
attachment,  
appointment,  
calendar, or task  
to print.  
Tap to view and select  
additional tools or options.  
 
ꢀ40 Programs  
Set up a printer  
You must configure your device to connect to a printer before you can start printing.  
1. On the JETCET PRINT screen, tap the settings button (  
) if you are not in  
the Settings tab, then:  
Tap Add Network Printer to set up and connect to a shared network  
printer.  
Note The device will wait continuously if you have entered an incorrect IP address  
while setting up a network printer.  
Tap Add Bluetooth Printer to set up and connect to a Bluetooth printer.  
Note  
To learn how to set up a printer, refer to the JETCET PRINT help on your device.  
Print a file  
1. Tap Start > Programs > JETCET PRINT.  
2. Locate and select the type of file that you want to print (document, image, or  
email/PIM) by tapping the corresponding tabs on the left side of the screen.  
3. Tap and hold the file that you want to print, then tap Print on the menu.  
4. Select a printer in the Choose a Printer list box, select the paper size, then  
tap Next.  
5. Choose the page layout in the list, then tap Next to print the file.  
Tip  
You can also print document and image files from File Explorer. To print, use File  
Explorer to locate the file you want to print. Tap and hold the file, then tap Print on  
the pop up menu.  
Print a web page  
1. Open your web browser and go to the web page that you want to print.  
2. Tap and hold the screen, then tap Print on the menu.  
3. Select a printer in the Choose a Printer list box, select the paper size, then  
tap Next to print the web page.  
Programs ꢀ41  
12.8 Microsoft® Office Mobile  
Microsoft® Office Mobile consists of the following applications:  
Microsoft® Office Excel® Mobile lets you create and edit Excel workbooks  
and templates on your device.  
Microsoft® Office OneNote® Mobile lets you create notes with text,  
photos, and voice recordings for synchronization later with Microsoft® Office  
OneNote® ꢀ00ꢃ on your computer.  
Microsoft® Office PowerPoint® Mobile allows you to view (not create) slide  
show presentations in *.ppt and *.pps formats.  
Microsoft® Office Word Mobile lets you create and edit documents and  
templates in Word Mobile and save them as *.doc, *.rtf, *.txt, and *.dot files.  
To use Microsoft Office Mobile  
1. Tap Start > Office Mobile.  
2. Tap the Office Mobile application that you want to use.  
Word Mobile and Excel Mobile do not fully support some features of Microsoft®  
Office Word and Microsoft® Office Excel®. To see a complete list of features that are  
not supported in Word Mobile and Excel Mobile, see Help on your device.  
Tips  
By default, Word Mobile saves documents in .docx format, while Excel Mobile  
saves workbooks in .xlsx format. If you want to open these types of files on  
a computer that uses Microsoft Office ꢀ000, Office XP, or Office ꢀ00ꢁ, you  
need to download and install the File Format Converter in your computer.  
You can find this converter at http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.  
aspx?FamilyId=941Bꢁ4ꢃ0-ꢁAE9-4AEE-8F4ꢁ-CꢂBBꢃ4CD14ꢂꢂ&displaylang=en.  
If you want Word Mobile to save documents in .doc format, tap Menu > Tools >  
Options (or Menu > Options when no document is opened), then change the  
Default template to Word 97-2003 Document (.doc).  
If you want Excel Mobile to save workbooks in a format that is compatible with  
Microsoft Office ꢀ000, Office XP, or Office ꢀ00ꢁ, tap Menu > Options (with no  
workbook opened), then change the Template for new workbook to Blank 97-  
2003 Workbook.  
 
ꢀ4ꢀ Programs  
12.9 Notes  
Using Notes, you can create handwritten and typed notes, record voice notes,  
convert handwritten notes to text for easy readability, and more.  
To create a note  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Notes. In the note list, tap New.  
2. Choose an input method and then enter your text.  
Tip  
For more information about input methods and entering text, see Chapter 4.  
3. When finished, tap OK to save and return to the note list.  
Notes  
To select handwritten text, tap and hold next to the writing. As soon as dots  
appear, and before they form a complete circle, quickly drag across the writing.  
If a letter crosses three ruled lines, it is treated as a drawing rather than text.  
To draw in a note  
1. Create or open a note file.  
2. Use the stylus to draw on the screen. A selection  
box then appears around your drawing.  
3. Tap OK to save.  
Note  
To select a drawing (for example, to copy or delete  
it), tap and hold the drawing briefly. When you lift  
the stylus, the drawing is selected.  
 
Programs ꢀ4ꢁ  
To record a voice note  
You can create a stand-alone recording (voice note) or you can add a recording to  
a note.  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Notes.  
2. If you do not see the Recording toolbar, tap Menu > View Recording  
Toolbar.  
3. Do one of the following:  
To add a recording to a note, create or open a note.  
To create a stand-alone recording, record from the note list.  
4. Tap the Record icon (  
) to begin recording your voice. Tap the Stop icon (  
) when you are finished recording.  
Tip  
To select the voice recording format, return to the note list and then tap  
Menu > Options > Global Input Options link (at the bottom of the Options screen).  
On the Input screen, tap the Options tab and choose the desired format from the  
Voice recording format list.  
12.10 Java  
MIDlets are Java applications such as games and tools that can run on mobile  
devices, while a MIDlet suite is a collection of one or more MIDlets. The Java  
program lets you download, install and manage MIDlets or MIDlet suites on your  
device. Your device supports Java ꢀ Micro Edition, JꢀME.  
To open the Java program  
Tap Start > Programs > Java.  
Install and launch MIDlets/MIDlet suites  
There are several ways to install a MIDlet/MIDlet suite.  
 
ꢀ44 Programs  
To download and install via Internet Explorer Mobile  
1. Tap Menu > Install > Browser to open Internet Explorer Mobile.  
2. Locate the MIDlet/MIDlet suite while connected to the Internet.  
3. Select the MIDlet/MIDlet suite to download.  
4. Information about the MIDlet/MIDlet suite is then displayed. Tap Continue.  
5. Confirm to start downloading.  
6. Select <root> or a folder where to install the MIDlet suite to, then tap OK.  
To install from your device  
You can copy MIDlets/MIDlet suites from the computer to your device using the  
USB sync cable or Bluetooth connection. Copy them to the root folder or any  
subfolder on your device.  
1. Tap Menu > Install > Local Files. The program then searches for MIDlets/  
MIDlet suites on your device and displays them in a list.  
2. From the list, tap the MIDlet/MIDlet suite that you want to install.  
3. Confirm to start the installation.  
4. Select <root> or a folder where to install the MIDlet suite to, then tap OK.  
To run a MIDlet/MIDlet suite  
Do one of the following:  
After installation of the MIDlet/MIDlet suite is complete, tap Yes.  
On the Java screen, open the folder that contains the MIDlet/MIDlet suite.  
Select the MIDlet/MIDlet suite, then tap Launch.  
Manage MIDlets/MIDlet suites  
You can organize MIDlets/MIDlet suites into folders for easy identification,  
renaming, updating, and more. If the device memory is full, uninstall some MIDlets/  
MIDlet suites to free up memory space.  
Programs ꢀ45  
To create folders  
1. On the Java screen, tap Menu > New Folder.  
2. Enter a folder name, then tap Create.  
To update a MIDlet/MIDlet suite  
Tap and hold a MIDlet/MIDlet suite, then tap Update. Alternatively, you can tap  
Menu > Actions > Update.  
Java will search for updates for the selected MIDlet/MIDlet suite where it was  
installed from before.  
To uninstall MIDlets  
Before you uninstall a MIDlet, make sure that it is not running.  
1. Tap and hold the MIDlet, then tap Uninstall.  
2. Tap OK to confirm.  
Note  
To uninstall all MIDlets and folders from the current folder, tap Menu > Uninstall All.  
12.11 SIM Manager  
SIM Manager allows you to view the contents of your SIM card, transfer contacts  
from your SIM card to your device or vice versa, and make a call to a SIM contact.  
To create a contact on your SIM card  
1. Tap Start > Programs > SIM Manager.  
2. Tap New and enter a contact name and phone number.  
3. Tap Save to save the information on your SIM card.  
Tip  
To change contact information on your SIM card, tap a SIM contact, edit the  
information, and then tap Save.  
 
ꢀ4ꢂ Programs  
To copy SIM contacts to your device  
If you have saved contacts on your SIM card, you can copy them into Contacts on  
your device.  
1. On the SIM Manager screen, select the desired contact, or select all SIM  
contacts by tapping Menu > Select All.  
2. Tap Menu > Save to Contacts.  
To copy contacts to the SIM card  
Only one phone number per contact name can be stored on a SIM card. When you  
copy a contact that has several phone numbers to your SIM card, SIM Manager  
saves each number under a separate name.  
To save each number under a different contact name on the SIM card, SIM Manager  
appends an indicator at the end of each name.  
By default, /M, /W and /H are appended to indicate mobile, work and home phone  
numbers respectively. You can edit this indicator first before you start copying  
contacts to your SIM card. Indicators of the other types of phone numbers are left  
empty for you to define them.  
1. On the SIM Manager screen, tap Menu > Tools >  
Options.  
2. Select the check boxes of the types of phone  
numbers that you want to be added to the SIM  
card.  
3. Under the Mark column, you can change the  
indicator that will be appended to the SIM contact  
names for each phone number type. To do so,  
select a phone type, tap Edit, enter your desired  
indicator, then tap Save.  
4. After modifying, tap OK.  
5. Tap Menu > Contacts to SIM.  
Programs ꢀ4ꢃ  
6. Select the check boxes of the contact’s phone numbers that you want to copy  
to your SIM card, then tap Save.  
To store your SIM card’s phone number  
1. On the SIM Manager screen,  
When your phone  
tap Menu > Tools > List of  
number is stored  
on the SIM card,  
it will appear on  
the SIM Manager  
screen.  
Own Numbers.  
2. Tap Voice Line 1.  
3. Change the name, if desired,  
then enter your mobile  
phone number.  
4. Tap Save.  
12.12 Tasks  
Use Tasks to keep track of things you need to do. A task can occur once or  
repeatedly (recurring).  
Your tasks are displayed in a task list. Overdue tasks are displayed in red. A reminder  
will be displayed when you have new tasks to be completed.  
To create a task  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Tasks.  
2. Tap Menu > New Task, enter a subject for the task, and fill in information  
such as start and due dates, priority, and so on.  
 
ꢀ48 Programs  
3. Specify the type of category for your task, so that it can be grouped with  
other related tasks. Tap Categories, then select a preset category (Business,  
Holiday, Personal, or Seasonal), or tap New to create your own category.  
4. When finished, tap OK.  
To change the priority of a task  
Before you can sort tasks by priority, you need to specify a priority level for each  
task.  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Tasks.  
2. Tap the task you want to change the priority for.  
3. Tap Edit, and tap a priority level in the Priority box.  
4. Tap OK to return to the task list.  
Note  
All new tasks are assigned a Normal priority by default.  
To show start and due dates in the task list  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Tasks.  
2. Tap Menu > Options.  
3. Select the Show start and due dates check box, then tap OK.  
12.13 Voice Recorder  
Voice Recorder lets you record your voice and quickly send it as an MMS or e-mail  
attachment, beam it via Bluetooth, or set the recorded voice as your ring tone.  
Note  
Voice Recorder saves voice recordings in AMR-NB (Adaptive Multi-Rate Narrowband)  
format only. This is a common speech audio format used in mobile devices.  
To record your voice  
1. Tap Start > Programs > Voice Recorder.  
2. Hold the device’s microphone close to your mouth.  
 
Programs ꢀ49  
to end the  
3. Touch Record or  
to start recording. Tap Stop or  
recording.  
To select or create a folder where to save voice recordings  
By default, all recordings are saved in the My Voices folder of the device. You can  
choose another folder or create a new folder to save your voice recordings.  
Note  
If a storage card is installed before you open Voice Recorder, the recordings are saved  
in the My Voices folder on the storage card by default.  
1. Tap the arrow beside the folder name on the top-left of the screen.  
2. In the menu that opens, choose an existing folder or touch Add/Delete to  
create a new folder.  
To play back a voice recording  
On the Voice Recorder screen, touch a voice recording, or navigate to a voice  
recording and then tap Play (  
).  
Tip  
If you need to adjust the sound volume, touch any of the status icons on the title bar  
and then touch the Volume icon (  
) to open the System Volume screen where you  
can adjust the volume.  
To send a voice recording through MMS  
Select a voice recording, then tap Menu > Send via MMS. A new MMS message is  
then created with the voice recording automatically inserted as an audio clip.  
See “MMSin Chapter ꢂ to learn how to compose and send MMS messages.  
To send a voice recording via e-mail  
Select a voice recording, tap Menu > Send, and then select an e-mail account.  
This creates a new e-mail message with the voice recording inserted as a file  
attachment.  
See “Using E-mailin Chapter ꢂ to learn how to send e-mails.  
ꢀ50 Programs  
To beam a voice recording via Bluetooth  
1. Select the voice recording you want to beam, then tap Menu > Beam File.  
Tip  
To select multiple recordings, tap and drag over the desired recordings or tap  
Menu > Select All.  
2. Tap the device you want to send the voice recording to.  
3. On the other device, accept the file transfer to receive the file.  
To set a voice recording as ring tone  
Select the voice recording, then tap Menu > Set as Ringtone.  
To rename or move a recording  
1. Select the voice recording, then tap Menu > Rename/Move.  
Tip  
To select multiple recordings, tap and drag over the desired recordings or tap  
Menu > Select All. Note that you can move multiple files, but you cannot  
rename multiple files simultaneously.  
2. In Name, enter the new voice recording name.  
3. To move the voice recording, select the new destination Folder and  
Location. Tap OK.  
12.14 Voice Speed Dial  
You can record voice tags so that you can dial a phone number or launch programs  
simply by speaking a word.  
To create a voice tag for a phone number  
1. On the TouchFLO Home screen, slide to the People tab and then touch All  
People to open the Contacts screen.  
Tip  
You can also touch Start > Contacts to open the Contacts screen.  
2. Do one of the following:  
Scroll to the desired contact, then touch Menu > Add Voice Tag.  
 
Programs ꢀ51  
Touch the desired contact to open the contact card and then touch  
Menu > Add Voice Tag.  
Use the stylus to tap and hold the desired contact, then tap Add Voice Tag.  
3. Select the phone number that you want to create a voice tag for, then touch  
Record ( ).  
Select the  
desired  
phone  
number.  
Touch the  
Record  
icon to start  
recording.  
Tip  
To ensure voice recognition accuracy, record your voice in a quiet place.  
4. When completed, a Voice Tag icon  
is displayed on the right of the item.  
To create a voice tag for a program  
Touch Start > Settings > Personal tab > Voice Speed Dial > Application tab.  
The Application tab displays a list of all installed programs on your device. The  
procedure for creating a voice tag for a program is the same as the procedure for  
creating a voice tag for a phone number.  
ꢀ5ꢀ Programs  
To make a call or launch programs using a voice tag  
1. Do any of the following:  
Press and hold the TALK/SEND button.  
Touch Start > Programs > Voice Speed Dial.  
2. After the beep, say the recorded voice tag that you have assigned to the  
phone number you want to call or the program you want to launch. The  
system will repeat the voice tag, then dial out or launch the program  
automatically.  
Note  
If the system cannot recognize your voice tag, move to a quiet place, then try again  
while speaking clearly.  
To view and test the voice tags you have created  
1. Touch Start > Settings > Personal tab > Voice Speed Dial.  
2. The Voice Tag tab displays a list that contains all the voice tags you have  
created. Select an item in the list, then do one of the following.  
Touch the Record button (  
Touch the Play button (  
Touch the Delete button (  
) to rebuild the voice tag.  
) to play the voice tag.  
) to delete the voice tag.  
Programs ꢀ5ꢁ  
12.15 WorldCard Mobile  
WorldCard Mobile lets you take a photo of a business card and easily export the  
contact information on the card into your Contacts.  
To open WorldCard Mobile  
Tap Start > Programs > WorldCard Mobile.  
Tap to open the  
Camera program  
and take a photo of  
a business card.  
Tap to view  
the WorldCard  
Mobile copyright  
information.  
Tap to open  
the WorldCard  
Mobile help.  
Tap to exit  
WorldCard Mobile.  
Capture and export business card information  
Capture a business card and export the card information as a new contact in your  
Contacts list.  
 
ꢀ54 Programs  
To capture a business card and export its information to Contacts  
1. Tap on the WorldCard Mobile screen.  
2. Tap the Virtual Camera button to take a photo of the business card, then tap  
the Back button on the Review screen. Refer to Chapter 11 for details on how  
to use the camera.  
Tip  
Make sure that the business card is displayed completely in the Camera screen  
before you take the photo, and that lighting is adequate.  
3. On the WorldCard Mobile screen, tap Recognize.  
Tips  
If you want to retake the shot, tap Re-Capture.  
For better recognition, choose the Language and Region based on the  
language used in the business card.  
4. The screen shows various contact information from the business card. Use the  
on-screen keyboard to edit the contact information, if needed.  
Tap the down  
arrow to change  
the field name.  
Clear this box  
if you do not  
want to include  
the particular  
information for  
the contact when  
exported to the  
Contacts list.  
Tap to open  
the on-screen  
keyboard and  
edit the contact  
details.  
Programs ꢀ55  
5. Tap Export, then go to your Contacts list to view the exported contact.  
For more information about using WorldCard Mobile, see Help on your device.  
12.16 ZIP  
The ZIP program increases the storage capacity of your device by allowing you to  
compress files in the conventional ZIP format. It also allows you to extract files from  
a ZIP file.  
To start ZIP on your device  
Tap Start > Programs > Zip.  
Each time you start ZIP, it searches for files that have the .zip file extension, and  
displays these files on the Archive List screen.  
 
ꢀ5ꢂ Programs  
To open a ZIP file and extract files  
1. Touch a ZIP file to open it, or navigate to a ZIP file and then touch  
File > Open Archive.  
Note You cannot select multiple ZIP files.  
2. From the ZIP file, select files by doing one of the following:  
Touch a file to select it.  
To select several files, touch Menu > Action and make sure Multi-Select  
Mode is selected. Select files by touching each file. (Touch a selected file  
to deselect it).  
To select all files, touch Menu > Action > Select All.  
3. Touch Menu > Action > Extract.  
4. Choose a folder where the files will be extracted to, then touch Extract.  
5. Touch Menu > File > Close Archive to close the ZIP file.  
To create a new ZIP archive  
1. Touch File > New Archive.  
2. On the Save As screen, enter the ZIP file name and choose a folder where  
you want to save it. You can also choose whether to save the ZIP file on the  
device’s main memory or storage card.  
3. Touch Save.  
4. Touch Menu > Action > Add.  
5. Navigate to the folder that contains the files you want to archive.  
6. Select files to add by doing one of the following:  
Touch a file to select it.  
To select several consecutive files, drag over the files.  
Programs ꢀ5ꢃ  
To select several non-contiguous files, use the stylus to tap and hold on  
the screen and then select Multi-Select Mode. Select files by tapping  
each file. (Tap a selected file to deselect it).  
To select all files, use the stylus to tap and hold on the screen and then tap  
Select All.  
7. Touch Add.  
8. Touch Menu > File > Close Archive to save and close the ZIP file.  
ꢀ58 Programs  
ꢀꢂ0 Managing Your Device  
13.1 Copying and Managing Files  
You can copy files between your device and computer, or copy files to a storage  
card installed on your device. You can also efficiently manage your files and folders  
using File Explorer.  
To copy files using Windows Mobile Device Center or ActiveSync  
1. Connect your device to the computer.  
2. Click File Management > Browse the contents of your device in Windows  
Mobile Device Center on your computer, or click Explore in ActiveSync on  
your computer. This opens Windows Explorer on your computer and displays  
the contents of your device.  
3. To copy a file from your device to your computer:  
a. Browse the contents of your device, right-click the file you want to copy,  
then click Copy.  
b. Right-click a folder on your computer, then click Paste.  
4. To copy a file from your computer to your device:  
a. Browse the folders on your computer, right-click the file you want to copy,  
then click Copy.  
b. Right-click a folder on your device, then click Paste.  
To manage files on your device using File Explorer  
File Explorer lets you browse and manage the contents of your device. The root  
folder on the device is named My Device, and contains the following folders: My  
Documents, Program Files, Windows, and more.  
1. Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer.  
2. Tap a folder or file to open it.  
3. To return to an upper level folder, tap Up and select the folder.  
 
Managing Your Device ꢀꢂ1  
4. To quickly delete, rename, or copy a file, tap and hold the file, then choose  
the desired operation on the shortcut menu. To copy or delete multiple files,  
tap and drag over the desired files to select, tap and hold the selection, then  
choose the desired operation on the shortcut menu.  
To copy files to a storage card  
1. Make sure that the storage card is properly installed on your device.  
2. Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer and navigate to the appropriate folder.  
3. Tap and hold the file you want to copy, then tap Copy.  
4. Tap the down arrow ( ), then tap Storage Card in the list.  
5. Tap and hold an empty area on the screen and then select Paste on the  
menu.  
Tip  
You can configure programs such as Word Mobile and Excel Mobile to directly save  
edited files onto a storage card. In the program's file list, tap Menu > Options, then  
select the Storage Card in the Save to box.  
13.2 Settings on your Device  
You can adjust the device settings to suit the way you work. To see all available  
settings, slide to the Settings tab on the Home screen and tap All Settings.  
Personal tab  
Icon  
Description  
Buttons Assign a program or function to a hardware button or set the device to  
vibrate every time a virtual button is pressed. You can also set the function you  
want to execute (for instance, lock the device) when you press and hold the END  
button.  
Input Set options for each of the input methods.  
 
ꢀꢂꢀ Managing Your Device  
Icon  
Description  
Lock Set a password for your device.  
Menus Set which programs will appear in the Start menu.  
Owner Information Enter your personal information on your device.  
Phone Customize phone settings such as ring tone, set a PIN number for your  
SIM card, and more.  
Sounds & Notifications Enable sounds for events, notifications, and more, and  
set the type of notification for different events.  
Today Customize the appearance and the information to be displayed on the  
Home screen.  
Voice Speed Dial Create voice tags for voice dialing contacts and SIM contacts as  
well as for launching programs.  
System tab  
Icon  
Description  
About This is where you can see basic information such as the Windows Mobile®  
version and type of processor used on your device. You can also specify a name  
for your device.  
Auto Volume Control Automatically adjust the volume to be the same level all  
throughout when you are recording your voice or when you are playing back  
video.  
Certificates See information about certificates that are installed on your device.  
Managing Your Device ꢀꢂꢁ  
Icon  
Description  
Clear Storage Reset your device to factory default settings.  
Clock & Alarms Set the device clock to the date and time of your locale or to a  
visiting time zone when you’re traveling. Alarms can also be set at specified days  
and times of a week.  
Customer Feedback Set your device to automatically send information about  
how you use Windows Mobile. By default, this option is disabled.  
Device Information See information about the firmware version, hardware,  
identity, and the duration of calls made on your device.  
Encryption Encrypt files on your storage card. Encrypted files will only be  
readable on your device.  
Error Reporting Enable or disable the device's error reporting function. When  
this function is enabled and a program error occurs, technical data about the state  
of the program and your computer will be logged in a text file and delivered to  
Microsoft's technical support if you choose to send it.  
External GPS Set the appropriate GPS communication ports, if required. You may  
need to do this when there are programs on your device that access GPS data or  
you have connected a GPS receiver to your device. See Help for details.  
G-Sensor Recalibrate the G-Sensor of the device. Use this function when  
auto-rotate is not working properly.  
Managed Programs Displays the programs that were installed on your device  
using System Center Mobile Device Manager.  
Memory Check the device memory allocation status and storage card  
information.  
Power Check the remaining battery power. You can also set the brightness of  
the backlight and timeout for turning off the display (switching device to Sleep  
mode) to conserve battery power.  
ꢀꢂ4 Managing Your Device  
Icon  
Description  
Regional Settings Set the regional configuration to use, including the format for  
displaying numbers, currency, date, and time on your device.  
Remove Programs Remove programs that you installed on your device.  
Screen Recalibrate the screen, apply ClearType, and change the screen text size.  
Task Manager Stop running programs and set the (  
) button to end programs  
immediately when you tap the button. For more information, see "Using Task  
Manager" in this chapter.  
TouchFLO Enable or mute the finger scrolling and panning sound. You can also  
use this setting to enable or disable the large Start menu, System Status screen,  
and transition effects when launching programs from TouchFLO ꢁD, and set the  
device to vibrate when you tap the TouchFLO ꢁD tabs, the YouTube™ function  
buttons, and the Opera zoom ( ) and exit full screen mode (  
) buttons.  
Uploader Lets you see the status of your photo and video uploads to social  
networking sites such as Facebook and YouTube™.  
Windows Update Link to Microsoft's web site and update Windows Mobile® on  
your device with the latest security patches or fixes, if they are available.  
Connections tab  
Icon  
Description  
Account Manager Enter and store your account information so you can log in  
to your favorite social networking sites such as Facebook and YouTube™ even  
without opening a web browser.  
Managing Your Device ꢀꢂ5  
Icon  
Description  
Advanced Network Turn HSPA on/off, set the GPRS authentication method, and  
set the line type to use when making circuit switch data (CSD) connection. HSPA is  
a ꢁ.5G digital data service that provides high-speed downstream/upstream data  
rates. In order for your device to attain the high connection speed of HSPA, your  
wireless service provider must support this feature and you must be within the  
coverage area of your service provider’s HSPA network. Your device supports up  
to ꢃ.ꢀ Mbps download speeds.  
Beam Set your device to receive incoming Bluetooth beams.  
Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on, set your device to visible mode, and scan for other  
Bluetooth devices.  
Comm Manager Manage your device’s connections (including GPRS/ꢁG, Wi-Fi,  
and Bluetooth) or turn the phone function on or off.  
Connection Setup Configure your device’s data connections, such as GPRS, and  
WAP, based on the detected or selected network operator. See “Using Connection  
Setupin this chapter for details.  
Connections Set up one or more types of modem connections for your device,  
such as phone dial-up, GPRS, and more, so that your device can connect to the  
Internet or a private local network.  
Domain Enroll Enroll your device in your company’s domain to let System  
Center Mobile Device Manager to manage the device. Please ask your Server  
Administrator for more details.  
USB to PC Set the type of USB connection to your PC. Select the ActiveSync  
option for synchronizing data, or use Disk Drive mode for transferring files.  
Wi-Fi Turn the Wi-Fi function on or off, scan for available wireless networks, see  
information about the active wireless network, and customize Wi-Fi settings.  
ꢀꢂꢂ Managing Your Device  
13.3 Changing Basic Settings  
Date and time  
To set the date and time  
1. On the Home screen Home tab, tap the time display and then tap the Time tab.  
Tip  
Tap the More tab and select the Display the clock on the title bar in all  
programs option to show the clock on all screens.  
2. Select the correct time zone and change the date or time.  
Note  
During synchronization, the time on your device is updated with the time on your  
computer.  
To set the date and time for a different location  
If you visit or communicate with someone in a particular time zone often, you can  
select it as your visiting time zone.  
1. On the Home screen Home tab, tap the time display and then tap the Time tab.  
2. Tap Visiting.  
3. Select the correct time zone and change the date or time.  
Regional settings  
The style in which numbers, currency, dates, and times are displayed is specified in  
regional settings.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Regional Settings > Region tab and then select your  
region from the list.  
Note This does not change the language of your device’s operating system.  
The region you select determines which options will be available on the other  
tabs.  
3. To customize regional settings further, tap the appropriate tabs and set the  
desired options.  
Managing Your Device ꢀꢂꢃ  
Display settings  
To adjust the screen brightness  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Power > Backlight tab.  
3. Clear the Auto adjust backlight check box to display the sliders for adjusting  
brightness.  
4. Adjust the brightness by dragging the slider under On battery power and  
On external power.  
Tip  
Select Auto adjust backlight to automatically adjust the backlight brightness  
according to the ambient lighting.  
To set the backlight to dim after a time delay  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Power > Advanced tab.  
3. In On battery power and On external power, select the Turn off backlight  
if device is not used for check box, then specify the time delay.  
To increase or decrease the size of text on the screen  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Screen > Text Size tab.  
3. Move the slider to increase or decrease the text size.  
Device name  
The device name is used to identify your device in the following situations:  
Synchronizing with a computer  
Connecting to a network  
Restoring information from a backup  
 
ꢀꢂ8 Managing Your Device  
Note  
If you synchronize multiple devices with the same computer, each device must have a  
unique name.  
To change the device name  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap About > Device ID tab.  
3. Enter the device name.  
Notes  
The device name must begin with a letter, consist of letters from A to Z, numbers  
from 0 to 9, and cannot contain spaces. Use the underscore character to separate  
words.  
If you enroll your device to your company’s domain, the device name will be  
changed to be the same as the one used to enroll the device.  
Ringer settings  
To change the ring type and ring tone  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap Sound.  
2. Scroll down and then tap Ring Type. Select the Ring Type you want to use  
and then tap Done.  
3. Tap Ringtone and then select the ringtone you want to use.  
4. Tap Done.  
Tips  
You can use *.wav, *.mid, *.mp3, *.wma, or other types of sound files that you  
downloaded from the Internet or copied from your computer as ring tones. To  
quickly set the music file as a ring tone, tap and hold the music file and then select  
Set As Ringtone. For a complete list of supported audio file formats for ring tones,  
see “Specificationsin the Appendix.  
To use your sound files as ring tones, copy them first to the /My Documents/My  
Ringtones folder on your device, then select the sound from the Ring tone list of  
your device. For more information about copying files, see “Copying and Managing  
Filesin this chapter.  
Managing Your Device ꢀꢂ9  
Alarms and notifications  
To set an alarm  
1. On the Home screen Home tab, tap the time display and then tap the Alarms  
tab.  
2. Tap <Description> and enter a name for the alarm.  
3. Tap the day of the week for the alarm. Select multiple days by tapping each  
desired day. Tap again to deselect the day.  
4. Tap the time to open a clock and set the time for the alarm.  
Tip  
You can drag the hour and minute hands of the clock to set the time.  
5. Tap the alarm icon (  
) to specify the type of alarm you want. You can  
choose a flashing light, a single sound, a repeating sound, or vibration.  
6. If you choose to play a sound, tap the list next to the Play sound check box  
and tap the sound you want.  
To choose how to be notified about events or actions  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap Sound >  
Advanced.  
2. On the Sounds tab, choose how you want to be notified by selecting the  
appropriate check boxes.  
3. On the Notifications tab, in Event, tap an event name and choose how you  
want to be notified by selecting the appropriate check boxes. You can choose  
from several options, such as a special sound, a message, a flashing light, or  
vibrate.  
Tip  
Turning off sounds and flashing light notifications helps conserve battery power.  
ꢀꢃ0 Managing Your Device  
Phone services  
Your device can directly link to the mobile phone network, and enable you to  
access and change the settings of various phone services for your device. Phone  
services may include Call Forwarding, Call Waiting, Voicemail, and more. Contact  
your wireless service provider to find out about the availability of phone services for  
your device.  
To access and change settings of phone services  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the Personal tab, tap Phone > Services tab.  
3. Select the service you want to use, then tap Get Settings.  
4. Choose your desired options, then tap OK.  
For more information about customizing settings of phone services, see Help on  
your device.  
13.4 Using Connection Setup  
Connection Setup configures your device’s data connections, such as GPRS and  
WAP, for you so that you do not need to enter the settings manually onto your  
device. All you need to do is to select your network operator, then Connection  
Setup does all the configuration for you.  
To automatically configure the device’s data connections  
The first time you power on your device, or when  
you insert a new SIM card and then power on your  
device, Connection Setup will display a notification  
message to inform you that it will automatically  
configure your device’s connection settings.  
1. Tap Yes on the notification message.  
Managing Your Device ꢀꢃ1  
Note If your SIM card supports multiple network operator profiles, the next message  
that appears will display network profile choices. Select the profile you want to  
use and tap OK.  
2. When prompted to automatically configure your device to the proper  
network settings, tap Yes.  
Connection Setup configures your device’s data connection settings.  
3. After the Connection Setup completes the configuration, tap Restart.  
To manually select the network operator to use for data connections  
You can also manually select your network operator from Connection Setup’s  
settings screen. Connection Setup will then reconfigure your device’s data  
connections settings based on the operator that you selected.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the Connections tab, tap Connection Setup.  
3. Select the network Country and Operator you want to use, then tap OK.  
Note If you choose a Country and/or Operator that is different from the installed SIM  
card network operator, you may not be able to access network services.  
4. When prompted to confirm whether you want to configure the data  
connection settings based on the selected network, tap Yes.  
Connection Setup configures the data connection settings.  
5. After the Connection Setup completes the configuration, tap Restart.  
 
ꢀꢃꢀ Managing Your Device  
13.5 Using Task Manager  
Task Manager lets you view and stop running programs, configure the  
button,  
and enable the Quick Menu on the Home screen.  
To open Task Manager  
Tap the Quick Menu button on the top right corner of the Home screen to  
open the Quick Menu, then tap  
.
On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings. On  
the System tab, tap Task Manager.  
To switch back to a running program  
Tap the program name in the Quick Menu.  
On the Task Manager screen, tap and hold the program name on the  
Running tab, then tap Activate.  
To configure the Exit (  
) button  
You can configure the Exit button to shut down running programs when the  
button is tapped, or to just temporarily close the program screen but keep the  
program running.  
1. On the Task Manager screen, tap the Button tab.  
2. Select the Enable the “X” button to end running programs check box.  
Note When the Enable the “X” button to end running programs check box is not  
selected, tapping the Exit button will only close a program screen. The program  
is not ended and continues to run in the background.  
3. Choose the action for shutting down programs (by tapping the  
by tapping and holding the button).  
4. Tap OK.  
button, or  
Managing Your Device ꢀꢃꢁ  
To close running programs from the Task Manager  
1. On the Task Manager screen, tap the Running tab.  
2. Do one of the following:  
Select the check box of the programs that you want to close, then tap  
Stop Selected.  
Tap Stop All to close all programs in the list.  
Tap Menu > Stop All but Selected to close all programs except those  
which check boxes are selected.  
Tip  
You can also close running programs from the Quick Menu on the Home screen. See  
“Quick Menuin Chapter 1 for details.  
To add a running program to the exclusive list  
If you add a running program to the Exclusive Programs List, it will not be closed  
when you tap Stop Selected or Stop All and will not be listed in the Quick Menu  
on the Home Screen.  
1. On the Task Manager screen, tap the Running tab.  
2. Tap and hold the program name, then tap Add Exclusive.  
Tip  
To remove a program from the exclusive list, tap the Exclusive tab, select the check  
box of the program, then tap Remove.  
To set the sorting preference and program icon size in the Quick Menu  
1. On the Task Manager screen, tap the Others tab.  
2. In Sort programs in Quick Menu by, choose whether to sort according to  
Program name or Memory usage. The list will be sorted in ascending order.  
3. In Program icon size in Quick Menu, choose whether to use Small size or  
Large size.  
 
ꢀꢃ4 Managing Your Device  
13.6 Protecting Your Device  
Protect your SIM card with a PIN  
You can protect your SIM card from unauthorized use by assigning a PIN (personal  
identification number). The default SIM card PIN is provided by your wireless service  
provider.  
To enable the SIM card PIN  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the Personal tab, tap Phone > PIN/PIN2 tab.  
3. Select the Require PIN when phone is used check box.  
4. Enter the PIN number and then tap OK. To change the PIN at any time, tap  
Change PIN.  
Tip  
Emergency calls can be placed at any time, without requiring a PIN.  
Protect your device with a password  
You can help keep your data more secure by requiring a password every time the  
device is turned on.  
To set a device password  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the Personal tab, tap Lock.  
3. Select the Prompt if device unused for check box, then specify the idle time  
before the device requires a password.  
4. In the Password type box, select the type of password you would like to use.  
Tip  
If your device is configured to connect to a network, use an alphanumeric  
password for increased security.  
5. Enter the password in both the Password and Confirm boxes.  
Managing Your Device ꢀꢃ5  
6. Tap OK. The next time the device is turned on, you will be prompted to enter  
your password.  
Notes  
To ensure that you can always make emergency calls, do not begin your password  
with the digits of your local emergency number.  
If you entered a hint, the hint will be displayed after the wrong password is entered  
five times.  
Each time a wrong password is entered, the device response time gets longer until  
the device appears to be not responding.  
If you forget your password, you can hard reset or clear the device memory. Before  
you do this, make sure you back up your data and files so that you can restore  
them back to your device. For more information about hard resetting the device  
and clearing the memory, see “Resetting Your Devicein this chapter.  
Encrypt files on your storage card  
You can set your device to encrypt files as they are saved on the storage card.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Encryption.  
3. Select Encrypt files when placed on a storage card.  
Notes  
Encrypted files can only be read on the device that encrypted them.  
Encrypted files are opened just like other files, provided you are using the device  
that encrypted them. There is no separate step for you to take to read these files.  
Important If Encrypt files when placed on a storage card is enabled, backup all files from  
the storage card before using Clear Storage, hard reset, or updating the ROM  
system software. Otherwise you will no longer be able to access the encrypted files  
on the storage card. Use ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center to transfer  
files between your storage card and computer. After the procedure, copy your files  
back to the storage card.  
 
ꢀꢃꢂ Managing Your Device  
13.7 Managing Memory  
To see how much memory is available for use  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Memory > Main tab. The amount of memory  
allocated to data storage versus program storage is displayed, as well as the  
amount of memory in use versus the available memory.  
To see the available space of the storage card  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Memory > Storage Card tab.  
If your device is running low on memory, try the following to free memory on your  
device:  
Close programs which are not in use.  
Move files and e-mail attachments to the storage card.  
Delete unnecessary files. Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer. Tap and hold  
the file, and tap Delete.  
Delete large files. To find large files on your device, tap Start > Programs >  
Search. In the Type list, tap Larger than 64 KB, and tap Search.  
In Opera Mobile or Internet Explorer Mobile, delete temporary Internet files  
and clear history information.  
Remove programs you no longer use.  
Reset your device.  
Managing Your Device ꢀꢃꢃ  
13.8 Resetting Your Device  
Soft reset  
Occasionally, you may need to reset your device. A soft (or normal) reset of your  
device clears all active program memory and shuts down all active programs. This  
can be useful when your device is running slower than normal, or a program is not  
performing properly. A soft reset is also necessary after the installation of some  
programs. If a soft reset is performed when programs are running, unsaved work  
will be lost.  
To perform a soft reset  
1. Remove the back cover.  
2. Use the stylus tip to press the RESET  
button located between the SIM card  
and the storage card slots.  
Your device restarts and displays the  
Home screen.  
Hard reset  
You can also perform a hard reset (also known as a full reset). A hard reset should  
only be performed if a normal reset does not solve a system problem. After a  
hard reset, the device is restored to its default settings—the way it was when you  
first purchased it and turned it on. Any programs you installed, data you entered,  
and settings you customized on your device will be lost. Only Windows Mobile®  
software and other pre-installed programs will remain.  
Warning! Your device will be set back to factory default settings. Make sure that any  
additional installed programs and/or user data have been backed up before you  
perform a hard reset.  
 
ꢀꢃ8 Managing Your Device  
Important If Encrypt files when placed on a storage card is enabled, backup all files from  
the storage card before using Clear Storage, hard reset, or updating the ROM  
system software. Otherwise you will no longer be able to access the encrypted files  
on the storage card. Use ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center to transfer  
files between your storage card and computer. After the procedure, copy your files  
back to the storage card.  
To perform a hard reset  
1. With the device turned off, press and hold the VOLUME UP and VOLUME  
DOWN buttons, then briefly press the POWER button.  
2. Continue pressing the VOLUME UP and VOLUME DOWN buttons until you see  
this message on the screen:  
This operation will delete  
all your personal data,  
and reset all settings to  
the manufacturer default  
settings. Press VolUp  
to restore manufacturer  
defaults, or press other  
keys to cancel.  
3. Release the VOLUME UP and VOLUME DOWN buttons.  
4. Press the VOLUME UP button to perform the hard reset, or press any other  
button to cancel the reset.  
Clear Storage  
You can also use Clear Storage to reset your device back to factory default settings.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Clear Storage.  
3. Enter “1234and then tap Yes.  
 
Managing Your Device ꢀꢃ9  
13.9 Windows Update  
You can update Windows Mobile® on your device with the latest updates, security  
patches or fixes, if these are available.  
To set up Windows Update  
The first time you run Windows Update, you need to set up how you want Windows  
Update to check for patches on the Microsoft web site.  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Windows Update.  
3. On the Update Setup screen, tap Next.  
4. Choose how you want to check for updates, Manual or Automatic, then tap  
Next.  
Note If you select Automatic, you will be asked if you want to use your current data  
plan to check for updates. Select or clear the Use my data plan to check for and  
download updates check box and tap Next.  
5. Tap Finish.  
To check for updates  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Windows Update.  
3. Tap Check Now.  
Note  
Windows Mobile® updates may not be available at all times. Check the Windows  
Mobile® web site for update information.  
ꢀ80 Managing Your Device  
To change Windows Update options  
1. On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab  
and then tap All Settings.  
2. On the System tab, tap Windows Update.  
3. Tap Menu and select the option you want to  
change.  
Tap Connections to change how the  
device connects to the Internet when  
checking for updates.  
Tap Change Schedule to change how  
Windows Update checks for Windows  
Mobile® updates.  
13.10 Battery Saving Tips  
How long your battery power lasts depends on the battery type and how you use  
your device. Try the following to help conserve battery life:  
When the device is not in use, press POWER to switch off the display.  
On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings. On  
the System tab, tap Power > Advanced tab of the Power settings screen.  
Here, you can specify the time before your device automatically turns off the  
display and backlight to conserve battery power. For optimum conservation,  
specify ꢁ minutes or less.  
On the Home screen, slide to the Settings tab and then tap All Settings. On  
the System tab, tap Power > Backlight tab to adjust the backlight brightness  
settings.  
 
Managing Your Device ꢀ81  
Use the AC adapter to plug your device into an external power outlet  
whenever possible, especially when using a storage card or when using a  
modem or other peripherals.  
Turn Bluetooth off when you are not using it. Make your device visible to  
other devices only when you are trying to establish a Bluetooth partnership.  
For more information about Bluetooth, see Chapter 9.  
Tap Start > Settings > Connections tab > Wi-Fi, tap the Wireless Networks  
button, then tap Menu > Advanced . From the Turn off Wi-Fi if not  
connected in list, select a timeout period so that Wi-Fi can be automatically  
turned off when your device is not connected to any wireless network for  
some time.  
Lower the volume.  
Close battery-intensive programs, such as the Camera, when you are done  
using them. Make sure the programs are ended and are not continuously  
running in the background. Refer to “Using Task Managerin this chapter for  
information on closing programs.  
 
ꢀ8ꢀ Managing Your Device  
ꢀ84 Appendix  
A.1 Specifications  
Processor  
Qualcomm® MSMꢃꢀ01A™ 5ꢀ8 MHz  
Windows Mobile® ꢂ.1 Professional  
Operating System  
Memory  
ROM: 51ꢀ MB  
RAM: ꢀ88 MB  
Dimensions (LxWxT)  
Weight  
115 mm x ꢂꢀ.8 mm x 1ꢀ mm (4.5ꢀ8 in x ꢀ.4ꢃꢀ in x 0.4ꢃꢀ in)  
14ꢃ grams (5.185 ounces) with battery  
Display  
ꢁ.8-inch TFT-LCD flat touch-sensitive screen with 480 x 800 WVGA  
resolution  
Network  
HSPA/WCDMA  
900/ꢀ100 MHz  
Up to ꢀ Mbps up-link and ꢃ.ꢀ Mbps down-link speeds  
Quad-band GSM/GPRS/EDGE  
850/900/1800/1900 MHz  
(Band frequency and data speed are operator dependent.)  
Device Control  
TouchFLO™ ꢁD  
Touch-sensitive front panel buttons  
GPS  
GPS  
Connectivity  
Bluetooth® ꢀ.0 with Enhanced Data Rate and AꢀDP for wireless  
stereo headsets  
Wi-Fi® (IEEE 80ꢀ.11b/g)  
HTC ExtUSB™ (11-pin mini-USB ꢀ.0)  
Camera  
Audio  
Main camera: 5.0 megapixel color camera with auto focus  
Second camera: VGA CMOS color camera  
Built-in ꢁ.5 mm audio jack, microphone, and speaker  
Ring tone formats:  
AAC, AAC+, eAAC+, AMR-NB, AMR-WB, QCP, MPꢁ, WMA, WAV  
40 polyphonic and standard MIDI format 0 and 1 (SMF) / SP  
MIDI  
 
Appendix ꢀ85  
Battery  
Rechargeable Lithium-ion polymer battery  
Capacity: 1ꢁ50 mAh  
Talk time:  
Up to 4ꢀ0 minutes for WCDMA  
Up to 480 minutes for GSM  
Standby time: Up to ꢂ80 hours for WCDMA  
Up to 440 hours for GSM  
Video call time: Up to 140 minutes  
(The above are subject to network and phone usage.)  
microSD™ memory card (SD ꢀ.0 compatible)  
Expansion Slot  
AC Adapter  
Voltage range/frequency: 100 - ꢀ40V AC, 50/ꢂ0 Hz  
DC output: 5V and 1A  
Special Features  
FM Radio, G-Sensor  
A.2 Regulatory Notices  
Regulatory Agency Identifications  
For regulatory identification purposes, your product is assigned a model number of  
BLAC100.  
To ensure continued reliable and safe operation of your device, use only the  
accessories listed below with your BLAC100.  
The Battery Pack has been assigned a model number of BLAC160.  
Note  
This product is intended for use with a certified Class ꢀ Limited Power Source, rated 5  
Volts DC, maximum 1 Amp power supply unit.  
ꢀ8ꢂ Appendix  
European Union Notice  
Products with CE marking comply with the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC), the EMC  
Directive (ꢀ004/108/EC), and the Low Voltage Directive (ꢀ00ꢂ/95/EC) issued by the  
Commission of the European Community.  
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the following European  
Norms (in parentheses are the equivalent international standards).  
EN 60950-1 (IEC 60950-1)  
Safety of Information Technology Equipment.  
ETSI EN 300 328  
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Wideband  
Transmission systems; data transmission equipment operating in the ꢀ.4 GHz  
ISM band and using spread spectrum modulation techniques.  
EN 300 440-2 V1.1.2  
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Short  
range devices; Radio equipment to be used in the 1 GHz to 40 GHz frequency  
range; Part ꢀ: Harmonized EN under Article ꢁ(ꢀ) of the R&TTE Directive.  
EN 301 489-24  
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and  
services; Part ꢀ4: Specific conditions for IMT-ꢀ000 CDMA direct spread (UTRA)  
for mobile and portable (UE) radio and ancillary equipment.  
ETSI EN 301 511  
Global system for mobile communications (GSM); Harmonized EN for  
mobile stations in the GSM 900 and GSM 1800 bands, covering essential  
requirements of article ꢁ.ꢀ of the R&TTE directive (1995/5/EC).  
ETSI EN 301 489-1  
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and  
services; Part 1: Common technical requirements.  
 
Appendix ꢀ8ꢃ  
ETSI EN 301 489-7  
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and  
services; Part ꢃ: Specific conditions for mobile and portable radio and  
ancillary equipment of digital cellular radio telecommunications systems  
(GSM and DCS).  
ETSI EN 301 489-17  
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standard for radio equipment and  
services; Part 1ꢃ: Specific conditions for ꢀ.4 GHz wideband transmission  
systems.  
ETSI EN 301 908-1 & -2  
Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM); Base  
Stations (BS), Repeaters and User Equipment (UE) for IMT-ꢀ000 Third  
Generation cellular networks; Part 1: Harmonized EN for IMT-ꢀ000,  
introduction and common requirements, covering essential requirements of  
article ꢁ.ꢀ of the R&TTE Directive.  
EN 50360 / 50361  
Product standard to demonstrate the compliance of mobile phones with the  
basic restrictions related to human exposure to electromagnetic fields (ꢁ00  
MHz ~ ꢁ GHz).  
EN 50392  
Generic standard to demonstrate the compliance of low power electronic and  
electrical apparatus with the basic restrictions related to human exposure to  
electromagnetic fields (10 MHz - ꢁ00 GHz) - General public.  
EN 55013:2001  
Sound and television broadcast receivers and associated equipment - Radio  
disturbance characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement (CISPR  
1ꢁ:ꢀ001 (Modified))  
ꢀ88 Appendix  
EN 55020:2007  
Sound and television broadcast receivers and associated equipment  
- Immunity characteristics - Limits and methods of measurement (CISPR  
ꢀ0:ꢀ00ꢂ)  
This equipment may be operated in:  
AT  
EE  
IT  
BE  
ES  
IS  
BG  
FI  
CH  
FR  
LT  
CY  
GB  
LU  
SE  
CZ  
GR  
LV  
SI  
DE  
HU  
MT  
SK  
DK  
IE  
LI  
NL  
TR  
NO  
PL  
PT  
RO  
Safety Precautions for RF Exposure  
Use only original manufacturer-approved accessories, or accessories that do not  
contain any metal.  
Use of non-original manufacturer-approved accessories may violate your local RF  
exposure guidelines and should be avoided.  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) Signals  
Your device contains a radio transmitter and receiver. The radiated output power  
is far below the international radio frequency exposure limits. These limits are part  
of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the  
general population. The guidelines are based on the safety standards previously set  
by international standards bodies:  
Appendix ꢀ89  
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) IEEE. C95.1-199ꢀ  
National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP).  
Report 8ꢂ. 198ꢂ  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 199ꢂ  
Ministry of Health (Canada), Safety Code ꢂ. The standards include a  
substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons,  
regardless of age and health.  
The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement  
known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The standard incorporates a  
substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to  
account for any variations in usage.  
As with other mobile radio transmitting equipment, users are advised that for  
satisfactory operation of the equipment and for the safety of personnel, it is  
recommended that no part of the human body be allowed to come too close to the  
antenna during operation of the equipment.  
Your device has an internal antenna. Use only the supplied integral antenna. Use of  
unauthorized or modified antennas may impair call quality and damage the phone,  
causing loss of performance and SAR levels exceeding the recommended limits as  
well as result in non-compliance with local regulatory requirements in your country.  
To assure optimal phone performance and ensure human exposure to RF energy  
is within the guidelines set forth in the relevant standards; always use your  
device only in its normal-use position. Do not touch or hold the antenna area  
unnecessarily when placing or receiving a phone call. Contact with the antenna  
area may impair call quality and cause your device to operate at a higher power  
level than needed. Avoiding contact with the antenna area when the phone is IN  
USE optimizes the antenna performance and the battery life.  
Body-worn measurements were tested for typical body-worn operations with the  
back of the device kept 1.5 cm from the body.  
ꢀ90 Appendix  
SAR Information  
0.ꢃꢀꢀ w/kg @10g (Head)  
1.0ꢀ w/kg @10g (Body)  
Telecommunications & Internet Association (TIA)  
Safety Information  
Pacemakers  
The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a minimum  
separation of six inches be maintained between a handheld wireless phone  
and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These  
recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and  
recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers:  
Should ALWAYS keep the phone more than six inches from their pacemaker  
when the phone is turned ON.  
Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket.  
Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for  
interference. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking  
place, turn the phone OFF immediately.  
Hearing Aids  
Some digital wireless phones may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event  
of such interference, you may want to consult your service provider, or call the  
customer service line to discuss alternatives.  
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your  
device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy. Your  
physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information.  
Turn the phone OFF in health care facilities when any regulations posted in  
these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using  
equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
Appendix ꢀ91  
WEEE Notice  
The Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), which entered  
into force as European law on 1ꢁth February ꢀ00ꢁ, resulted in a major change in the  
treatment of electrical equipment at end-of-life.  
The purpose of this Directive is, as a first priority, the prevention of WEEE, and  
in addition, to promote the reuse, recycling and other forms of recovery of such  
wastes so as to reduce disposal.  
The WEEE logo (shown at the left) on the product or on its box indicates  
that this product must not be disposed of or dumped with your other  
household waste. You are liable to dispose of all your electronic or  
electrical waste equipment by relocating over to the specified collection  
point for recycling of such hazardous waste. Isolated collection and  
proper recovery of your electronic and electrical waste equipment at  
the time of disposal will allow us to help conserving natural resources.  
Moreover, proper recycling of the electronic and electrical waste  
equipment will ensure safety of human health and environment. For  
more information about electronic and electrical waste equipment  
disposal, recovery, and collection points, please contact your local  
city center, household waste disposal service, shop from where you  
purchased the equipment, or manufacturer of the equipment.  
RoHS Compliance  
This product is in compliance with Directive ꢀ00ꢀ/95/EC of the European  
Parliament and of the Council of ꢀꢃ January ꢀ00ꢁ, on the restriction of the use of  
certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS) and its  
amendments.  
ꢀ9ꢀ Appendix  
Index  
A
B
AꢀDP 18ꢀ  
Back cover  
- remove ꢀ8  
Backlight  
ActiveSync  
- ActiveSync mode 44  
- set up 10ꢂ  
- synchronize with computer 10ꢃ  
- synchronize with Exchange Server 1ꢁ4  
Add and remove programs ꢀꢀ8  
Adobe Reader LE ꢀꢀ9  
Airplane Mode ꢂ1, ꢀꢁ8  
- adjust brightness ꢀꢂꢃ  
- set backlight timeout ꢀꢂꢃ  
Basic settings ꢀꢂꢂ  
Battery  
- battery information ꢀ9  
- charge battery ꢁ1  
- install ꢁ0  
Album  
- about ꢀ09  
- close Album ꢀ14  
- play back video ꢀ14  
- select a photo or video to view ꢀ09  
- view an image ꢀ10  
Attachment  
- add to e-mail 1ꢀ8  
- download 1ꢁ0  
- remove ꢁ0  
- save battery power 149, ꢀ80  
Beam via Bluetooth 18ꢁ  
Block Recognizer 9ꢃ  
Bluetooth  
- about 180  
- hands-free headset 18ꢀ  
- modem 1ꢃꢂ  
- modes 180  
- set IMAP4 to automatically receive  
attachments 1ꢁꢀ  
- set Outlook to automatically receive  
attachments 1ꢁꢀ  
Audio Booster ꢀꢀ4  
Auto Volume Control ꢀꢂꢀ  
- partnership (pairing) 181  
- SIM Access Profile (SAP) ꢂ1  
- stereo headset 18ꢀ  
- synchronize 109  
- turn on and off ꢀꢁ8  
- visible 180  
ꢀ94 Index  
Contacts Picture capture mode 19ꢃ  
Copy  
- contacts to SIM card ꢀ4ꢂ  
- copy and manage files ꢀꢂ0  
- media files from PC to device ꢀ1ꢃ  
- SIM contacts to device ꢀ4ꢂ  
C
Calendar  
- create appointment ꢀꢁ0  
- send appointment ꢀꢁꢁ  
- view appointment ꢀꢁꢀ  
Call History 55  
Calling  
D
- from Contacts 51  
- from Home screen 51  
- from Phone screen 49  
Camera  
- about 19ꢂ  
- Advanced Options  
Device name ꢀꢂꢃ  
Dial-up 151  
Direct Push 1ꢁꢂ, ꢀꢁ9  
Disconnect data connection ꢀꢁ9  
Disk Drive mode 44  
Download  
- download complete e-mail 1ꢀ9  
- e-mail download settings 1ꢀ5, 1ꢁ1  
- file attachments 1ꢁ0  
- Java applications ꢀ44  
- satellite data 19ꢀ  
- synchronize e-mails 1ꢁ1  
- web feeds 1ꢂ9  
- capture modes 19ꢂ  
- file formats 19ꢃ  
- icons ꢀ00  
- Menu Panel ꢀ0ꢀ  
- zooming ꢀ0ꢁ  
Car kit phones ꢂ1  
Clear Storage ꢀꢃ8  
Clock & Alarms ꢀꢂꢁ, ꢀꢂꢂ, ꢀꢂ9  
Comm Manager ꢀꢁ8, ꢀꢂ5  
Compact QWERTY 9ꢁ  
Company Directory 14ꢀ  
Conference call 54  
Configure data connection settings ꢁꢀ, ꢀꢃ0  
Connect device to Internet  
- Dial-up 151  
- start a connection 15ꢀ  
- ways of connecting 14ꢂ  
Connection Setup ꢁꢀ, ꢁ9, ꢀꢃ0  
Contacts ꢀꢁ4  
E
E-mail  
- Internet e-mail account (POPꢁ/  
IMAP4) 1ꢀ4  
- mail server settings 1ꢀ5  
- Mail tab (Home screen) ꢃ1  
- send 1ꢀ8  
- settings (POPꢁ/IMAP4) 1ꢀ5  
- setup wizard 1ꢀ4  
- synchronize 10ꢀ, 1ꢁ1, 1ꢁ4  
Index ꢀ95  
- types of e-mail accounts 1ꢀꢀ  
Emergency call 51  
Emoticon  
I
IMAP4 1ꢀ4  
Input methods  
- MMS 1ꢀ0  
- Block Recognizer 9ꢃ  
- Compact QWERTY 9ꢁ  
- Full QWERTY 91  
- Letter Recognizer 98  
- Transcriber 98  
- Windows Live Messenger 1ꢂ8  
Entering Information 90  
Equalizer ꢀꢀ4  
Excel Mobile ꢀ41  
Exchange Server 1ꢁ4  
Input Panel 90  
Input Selector arrow 90  
International call 51  
Internet 14ꢂ  
Internet e-mail 1ꢀ4  
Internet Sharing 1ꢃ5  
Internet tab (Home screen) ꢃꢁ  
F
Favorite contacts ꢂ8  
File Explorer ꢀꢂ0  
Find contact  
- Company Directory 14ꢀ  
- on device ꢀꢁꢂ  
Finger gestures 8ꢂ  
Finger panning 8ꢃ  
Finger scrolling 8ꢂ  
FM Radio ꢀꢀ1  
J
Java  
- create folders ꢀ45  
- install MIDlets/MIDlet suites from  
device ꢀ44  
- install MIDlets/MIDlet suites from  
Internet ꢀ44  
- manage MIDlets/MIDlet suites ꢀ44  
- uninstall MIDlets ꢀ45  
Focus  
- auto-focus 198  
- Touch Focus 198  
Forward e-mail 1ꢁ0  
Full QWERTY 91  
- update a MIDlet/MIDlet suite ꢀ45  
G
G-Sensor ꢀꢂꢁ  
Google Maps 188  
L
Letter Recognizer 98  
Library  
- Music tab (Home screen) 80  
- Windows Media Player Mobile ꢀ1ꢂ  
Live Messenger 1ꢂꢃ  
H
Hard reset ꢀꢃꢃ, ꢀꢃ8  
Home screen ꢁꢃ, ꢂ4  
ꢀ9ꢂ Index  
M
N
Mail tab (Home screen) ꢃ1  
Meeting request 140, ꢀꢁꢁ  
Messages tab (Home screen) ꢃ0  
Messaging  
News channels (web feeds) 1ꢂ9  
Now Playing  
- Music tab (Home screen) ꢃ9, 80  
- Windows Media Player Mobile ꢀ1ꢂ  
Numeric and Symbol Mode 9ꢂ  
- about 11ꢀ  
- multimedia (MMS) 11ꢂ  
- text (SMS) 11ꢁ  
Messenger 1ꢂꢃ  
microSD card  
O
Office Mobile ꢀ41  
OneNote Mobile ꢀ41  
Open PDF file ꢀꢀ9  
Opera Mobile 15ꢁ  
- install ꢁ1  
Microsoft Office Mobile ꢀ41  
MIDlet/MIDlet suite ꢀ4ꢁ  
MMS  
P
Panorama capture mode 19ꢃ  
Password ꢀꢃ4  
- about 11ꢂ  
- add audio clip 1ꢀ0  
- add photo/video 119  
- add text 1ꢀ0  
People tab (Home screen) ꢂ8  
Phone 48  
Phone services ꢀꢃ0  
Photo capture mode 19ꢃ  
Photos and Videos tab (Home screen) ꢃꢁ  
Picture Theme capture mode 19ꢃ  
- blacklist 1ꢀꢀ  
- create MMS message 118  
- MMS settings 11ꢃ  
- reply message 1ꢀ1  
- view message 1ꢀ1  
MMS Video capture mode 19ꢃ  
Modem  
- Bluetooth 1ꢃꢂ  
- USB 1ꢃꢂ  
MPꢁ Trimmer ꢀꢀ5  
Multimedia 11ꢂ, 195  
Multitap 94  
Playlists  
- Music tab (Home screen) 81  
- Windows Media Player Mobile ꢀꢀ0  
Play media ꢀ19  
Play music  
- Music tab (Home screen) ꢃ9  
- Windows Media Player Mobile ꢀ19  
Podcasts 1ꢃ4  
Music tab (Home screen) ꢃ9  
POPꢁ 1ꢀ4  
Index ꢀ9ꢃ  
PowerPoint Mobile ꢀ41  
Programs ꢀꢀ8  
Programs tab (Home screen) 85  
Put call on hold 5ꢁ  
S
Safety information 5  
Screen text size ꢀꢂꢃ  
Send  
- e-mail 1ꢀ8  
Q
- MMS message 118  
- text message (SMS) 11ꢁ  
Settings (Connections tab)  
- Advanced Network ꢀꢂ5  
- Beam ꢀꢂ5  
QuickGPS 19ꢀ  
Quick menu 4ꢀ, ꢀꢃꢀ  
R
Record  
- Bluetooth ꢀꢂ5  
- voice note ꢀ4ꢁ  
- voice recording ꢀ48  
Regional Settings ꢀꢂ4, ꢀꢂꢂ  
Regulatory notices ꢀ85  
Reply  
- e-mail 1ꢁ0  
- MMS 1ꢀ1  
- Connections 151, ꢀꢂ5  
- Connection Setup ꢀꢂ5, ꢀꢃ0  
- Domain Enroll ꢀꢂ5  
- USB to PC 109, ꢀꢂ5  
- Wi-Fi 149, ꢀꢂ5  
Settings (Personal tab)  
- Buttons ꢀꢂ1  
- text (SMS) ꢃ1, 115  
Reset  
- Input ꢀꢂ1  
- clear storage ꢀꢃ8  
- hard reset ꢀꢃꢃ  
- soft reset ꢀꢃꢃ  
Review screen (Camera) 199  
Ring tone 84, ꢀꢂ8  
Ring type ꢀꢂ8  
RSS Hub  
- Menus ꢀꢂꢀ  
- Owner Information ꢀꢂꢀ  
- Sounds & Notifications ꢀꢂꢀ, ꢀꢂ9  
- Today ꢀꢂꢀ  
- Voice Speed Dial ꢀ5ꢀ, ꢀꢂꢀ  
Settings (System tab)  
- about 1ꢂ9  
- headline list 1ꢃꢀ  
- news channels 1ꢂ9  
- podcasts 1ꢃ4  
- summary view 1ꢃꢁ  
- Certificates ꢀꢂꢀ  
- Clear Storage ꢀꢂꢁ, ꢀꢃ8  
- Clock & Alarms ꢀꢂꢁ, ꢀꢂꢂ, ꢀꢂ9  
- Customer Feedback ꢀꢂꢁ  
- Device Information ꢀꢂꢁ  
ꢀ98 Index  
- Encryption ꢀꢂꢁ, ꢀꢃ5  
Stock  
- market summary ꢃꢂ  
- portfolio ꢃꢂ  
- quote ꢃ4  
Stock tab (Home screen) ꢃꢁ  
Storage card  
- Error Reporting ꢀꢂꢁ  
- External GPS ꢀꢂꢁ  
- Managed Programs ꢀꢂꢁ  
- Memory ꢀꢂꢁ  
- Power ꢀꢂꢁ  
- Regional Settings ꢀꢂ4, ꢀꢂꢂ  
- Remove Programs ꢀꢀ9, ꢀꢂ4  
- Task Manager ꢀꢂ4, ꢀꢃꢀ  
- TouchFLO 41, 8ꢃ, ꢀꢂ4  
- Windows Update ꢀꢂ4, ꢀꢃ9  
Settings tab (Home screen) 84  
SIM Access Profile (SAP) ꢂ1  
SIM card  
- install ꢀ8  
- PIN ꢀꢃ4  
- remove ꢀ9  
SIM Manager  
- encrypt ꢀꢃ5  
- install ꢁ1  
Streaming Media 1ꢂꢀ  
Swap/switch calls 5ꢁ  
Synchronize  
- ActiveSync 10ꢃ  
- change information types 108  
- music and videos 110  
- via Bluetooth 109  
- Windows Media Player ꢀ1ꢃ  
- Windows Mobile Device Center 10ꢁ  
- with computer 84, 10ꢃ  
- with Exchange Server 84, 1ꢁ4  
- about ꢀ45  
- copy contacts to SIM card ꢀ4ꢂ  
- copy SIM contacts to device ꢀ4ꢂ  
- create SIM contact ꢀ45  
Sleep mode ꢁꢁ  
Smart Dial 49  
T
Task Manager ꢀꢂ4, ꢀꢃꢀ  
Text messages  
- copy from SIM card 11ꢂ  
- copy to SIM card 11ꢂ  
- create new message 11ꢁ  
- Messages tab (Home screen) ꢃ0  
- send 114  
Soft reset ꢀꢃꢃ  
Sounds & Notifications ꢀꢂꢀ, ꢀꢂ9  
Speakerphone 54  
Specifications ꢀ84  
Speed Dial 5ꢂ  
Start menu 41  
Status icons ꢁ8  
Text size (screen) ꢀꢂꢃ  
TouchFLO ꢁD ꢂꢁ  
Transcriber 98  
Index ꢀ99  
Troubleshoot  
- sync connection 109  
- for phone number ꢀ50  
- for program ꢀ51  
- Windows Media Player Mobile ꢀꢀ0  
Turn device on and off ꢁꢀ  
- make call or launch program ꢀ5ꢀ  
Turn phone function on and off ꢀꢁ8  
Turn the phone function on and off ꢂ0  
W
Weather tab (Home screen) 8ꢀ  
U
Windows Live 1ꢂ5  
USB modem 1ꢃꢂ  
USB to PC 109, ꢀꢂ5  
Windows Live Messenger 1ꢂꢃ  
Windows Media Player Mobile  
- file formats ꢀ15  
- menus ꢀ1ꢂ  
- playlists ꢀꢀ0  
- troubleshoot ꢀꢀ0  
V
Vibrate ꢁ8, 4ꢁ, 51, ꢀꢂ9  
Video call  
Windows Mobile Device Center 10ꢁ  
Windows Update ꢀꢂ4, ꢀꢃ9  
Word Mobile ꢀ41  
- about 5ꢂ  
- answer video call ꢂ0  
- make video call 5ꢂ  
- settings 5ꢃ  
WorldCard Mobile ꢀ5ꢁ  
Video capture mode 19ꢃ  
Voice call  
- about 49  
Y
YouTube 15ꢃ  
- answer call 5ꢀ  
- end call 54  
Voicemail 5ꢀ  
Z
ZIP  
Voice Recorder ꢀ48  
Voice Speed Dial  
- create  
- create archive ꢀ5ꢂ  
- open ZIP file and extract files ꢀ5ꢂ  
- overview ꢀ55  
Zooming  
- voice tag for phone number ꢀ50  
- voice tag for program ꢀ51  
- make call or launch program ꢀ5ꢀ  
Voice tag  
- Camera ꢀ0ꢁ  
- finger gestures 8ꢃ  
- Opera Mobile 155  
- create  
ꢁ00 Index  

Motorola W270 User Manual
Morphy Richards 28024 User Manual
JVC KD SV3104 User Manual
HTC Touch Diamond DIAM100 User Manual
Honeywell Cell Phone 6000 User Manual
Honda Power Equipment CD Changer User Manual
DeLonghi ICM30 User Manual
Corsair Padlock 2 User Manual
American Audio SCD 100 User Manual
American Audio DCD PRO1000 User Manual